JP7295005B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result. For example, Patent Literature 1 discloses a gaming machine that controls a state in which a jackpot game can be executed based on the stationary display of seven symbols in the decorative symbol display device.

JP 2014-147575 A

According to the gaming machine described above, during execution of the big win start effect, it is configured to issue a right hitting instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the right by operating the ball shooting handle. There is still room for improvement with respect to such an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

The present invention has been devised in view of such circumstances, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing an instruction prompting a player to shoot a game ball in a predetermined direction. be.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a movable body operably provided;
A specific effect of informing the effect result by operating the movable body, and a suggestive effect of suggesting that the specific effect will be executed by operating the movable body before the specific effect is executed. , a production executing means capable of executing
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium according to a player's operation;
Guidance display means for performing a guidance display urging the player to shoot the game medium toward the second area of the first area and the second area;
a guide light emitting means for emitting guide light to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second area by moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means;
The production executing means is
The effect image for the movable body is not displayed when the suggestive effect is executed, while the effect image for the movable body is displayed when the specific effect is executed,
displaying a specific image while executing the suggestive effect and changing the aspect of the specific image;
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
The second guidance display is performed during a first period of a predetermined period during which a start effect relating to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, and a second period during the predetermined period and after the first period. in performing the first guide display and the second guide display, and performing the second guide display while ending the first guide display in a subsequent period;
performing the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed;
The guidance light emitting means causes the light emitting means to emit light in a manner different from the guidance light emission during the first period, extinguishes the light emitting means before the second period starts, and the second period starts. When performing the guide light emission in conjunction with the first guide display ,
It is characterized by
Furthermore, the game machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R);
A specific effect (for example, a movable body motion effect A or a movable body motion effect B) for announcing the effect result by moving the movable body, and repeatedly moving the movable body before the specific effect is executed. Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a movable body action suggestive effect A or a movable body action suggestive effect B) that suggests that the specific effect will be executed by 10-19 for executing the effect processing during variable display);
with
The production executing means is
The effect image for the movable body is not displayed when the suggestive effect is executed, while the effect image for the movable body is displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 to 10-35). Thus, while the movable body motion suggestive effect B is being executed, the image display device 5 does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B. is displayed),
A specific image is displayed while the suggestion effect is being executed, and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of super reach β1 If so, ally character B and enemy character A are displayed, and ally character B and enemy character A are displayed in an enlarged manner. (the part where the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed in an enlarged manner),
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, an effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the image display device 5 where the effect image 109SG005X is displayed),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and an advantageous state is obtained when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of super reach β2, in which friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect, A portion where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, whereas the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
moreover,
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
Guidance display is provided to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, using an image display. and a guidance display means for performing
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. performing a second guidance display, performing the first guidance display after completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state, and continuing the second guidance display;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated;
Continuing the second guide display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is finished;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect image can make the enlarged display of the specific image and the performance action of the movable body more conspicuous, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.
Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the invention according to the following means 1.
A gaming machine that controls a state in which a jackpot game can be executed based on the fact that 7 symbols are stopped and displayed together in a decorative symbol display device as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-147575. is disclosed.

According to the gaming machine described above, during execution of the big win start effect, it is configured to issue a right hitting instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the right by operating the ball shooting handle. There is still room for improvement with respect to such an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

It has been devised in view of such circumstances, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing an instruction prompting a player to shoot a game ball in a predetermined direction.

(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
Guidance display is provided to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, using an image display. and a guidance display means for performing
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. performing a second guidance display, performing the first guidance display after completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state, and continuing the second guidance display;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated;
The second guidance display is continued in the special state after the control of the advantageous state is finished.
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is the schematic of a movable body unit. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing whether or not a pre-reading advance notice effect is executed and the determination ratio of the display pattern; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of updating a first reserved memory display area and a second reserved memory display area; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a variable display control timer and a movable body control timer; It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach α1 jackpot and super reach α2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach α1 loss and super reach α2 loss. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach β1 jackpot and the super reach β2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the presence or absence of a movable body suggesting motion and an image magnification ratio in each enlargement display period; (A) is a diagram showing an effect mode of each movable body action suggesting effect, and (B) is a view showing an effect mode of each movable body action effect. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation form to the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production|presentation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the ready-to-win production in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the ready-to-win production in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the characterizing part of the present embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a frame lamp. It is an explanatory diagram showing a special figure LED board and a fourth symbol unit. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. 1 is a front view of an image display device; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a hit type table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is explanatory drawing which shows a big-hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design variation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit opening post-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation processing during a big hit. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during hit variation. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a big hit. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. It is explanatory drawing which shows the lighting mode of a lamp|ramp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from power failure during the fanfare production|presentation by special figure 1 hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure during 1 round of big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 1 big hit at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure during two rounds of big hits at the time of one special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 2 rounds of big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 3 big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of returning from power failure during the 4 big hit rounds at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from power failure between the rounds after 4 big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of resetting from power failure during the jackpot final round at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of returning from power failure during the ending production at the time of special figure 1 hit.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

[form]
The game machine of form 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R);
A specific effect (for example, a movable body motion effect A or a movable body motion effect B) for announcing the effect result by moving the movable body, and repeatedly moving the movable body before the specific effect is executed. Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a movable body action suggestive effect A or a movable body action suggestive effect B) that suggests that the specific effect will be executed by 10-19 for executing the effect processing during variable display);
with
The production executing means is
The effect image for the movable body is not displayed when the suggestive effect is executed, while the effect image for the movable body is displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 to 10-35). Thus, while the movable body motion suggestive effect B is being executed, the image display device 5 does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B. is displayed),
A specific image is displayed while the suggestion effect is being executed, and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of super reach β1 If so, ally character B and enemy character A are displayed, and ally character B and enemy character A are displayed in an enlarged manner. (the part where the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed in an enlarged manner),
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, an effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the image display device 5 where the effect image 109SG005X is displayed),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and an advantageous state is obtained when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of super reach β2, in which friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect, A portion where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, whereas the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect image can make the enlarged display of the specific image and the performance action of the movable body more conspicuous, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
The enlargement speed in the enlargement display differs between the first timing in the enlargement display and the second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first enlargement The portion where the enlargement speed differs between the display period and the second enlargement display period),
The motion speed of the movable body in the suggestive effect is the same between the first timing and the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the movement speed of the movable body 109SG401 is the same in the second enlarged display period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the rendering effect of the enlarged display and reduce the control load related to the movement of the movable body.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 1 or form 2,
After the second timing, a non-enlargement period in which the specific image is not enlarged (for example, as shown in FIGS. period to timing),
The display mode during the non-enlargement period is different from the display mode immediately before the non-enlargement period (for example, as modification 109SG-2, after the end of the enlargement display period, the image display device 5 displays a specific effect or an effect image by displaying, etc., the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that it is a non-expansion period.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to form 2 or 3,
The effect executing means can gradually enlarge and display the specific image even after the repetitive motion of the movable body is completed (for example, during the third enlarged display period shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24). the part that executes the enlarged display),
The enlargement speed at the second timing is slower than the enlargement speed at the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. slow part),
The enlargement speed of the enlarged display after the end of the repeated motion of the movable body is slower than the enlargement speed at the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 3 Enlarged display period is a part where the enlargement speed is slower than the second enlarged display period)
According to this feature, since the enlarged display of the specific image is continued even after the repetitive motion of the movable body is finished, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to forms 1 to 4,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect) that foretells that it will be controlled in an advantageous state,
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the execution of the notice effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. part that restricts execution)
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player's attention on the specific image from being lowered due to the execution of the announcement effect.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to forms 1 to 5,
The effect executing means has different visibility of the specific image when moving the movable body in the suggestive effect and when moving the movable body in the specific effect (for example, FIGS. 10-32 and 10-32). As shown in 34, the player can visually recognize the ready-to-win effect during execution of movable body motion suggestive effect B, but as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, during execution of movable body motion effect B is a portion where the visibility of the reach effect is reduced by displaying the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the visibility of the specific image changes according to the motion state of the movable body, it is possible to easily understand whether the action is a suggestive effect or a specific effect, and the movable body and the specific image are easily discernible. You can adjust the degree of attention of

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to forms 1 to 6,
The effect execution means is capable of displaying a first effect image for the movable body and a second effect image for the specific image (for example, in the modification 109SG-3, the image display device 5 can display the movable body A portion where both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion corresponding to the action and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production can be displayed),
The size of the first effect image and the size of the second effect image are different (for example, as a modification 109SG-3, an explosion effect image 109SG005B corresponding to the movement of the movable body and an effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production parts that differ in size)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to display an effect image having an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the movable object and the specific image.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to forms 1 to 7,
The effect execution means is capable of displaying a first effect image for the movable body and a second effect image for the specific image (for example, in the modification 109SG-3, the image display device 5 can display the movable body A portion where both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion corresponding to the action and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production can be displayed),
The image transparency of the first effect image and the image transparency of the second effect image are different (for example, as modification 109SG-3, the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion corresponding to the movement of the movable body and the progress of the battle production The part that makes the image transparency different from the corresponding effect image)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to display an effect image with an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movable body and the specific image.

The game machine of form 9 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R);
A specific effect (for example, a movable body motion effect A or a movable body motion effect B) for announcing the effect result by moving the movable body, and repeatedly moving the movable body before the specific effect is executed. Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a movable body action suggestive effect A or a movable body action suggestive effect B) that suggests that the specific effect will be executed by 10-19 for executing the effect processing during variable display);
with
The production executing means is
A specific image can be displayed when the specific effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. A part that displays character A, and displays friendly character B and enemy character B if the reach performance of super reach β2 is being performed),
End the motion of the movable body in the suggestive effect a predetermined period before the timing of starting the motion of the movable body in the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, the movable body A portion where the movable body action suggestion effect ends before the period T3 from the start of execution of the action effect),
Before and after the predetermined period, different types of effect sounds can be output (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, BGM , SE, while outputting an action-indicating sound, outputting BGM, SE, and a jackpot notification sound from the speakers 8L, 8R during execution of the movable body action presentation),
The number of types of sound effects during the predetermined period is smaller than the types of sound effects that were output immediately before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, during period T3 is the part where only SE is output from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and an advantageous state is obtained when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of super reach β2, in which friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect, A portion where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the type of effect sound changes before and after the predetermined period in which the movable body does not operate.

The game machine of form 10 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R);
A specific effect (for example, a movable body motion effect A or a movable body motion effect B) for announcing the effect result by moving the movable body, and repeatedly moving the movable body before the specific effect is executed. Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a movable body action suggestive effect A or a movable body action suggestive effect B) that suggests that the specific effect will be executed by 10-19 for executing the effect processing during variable display);
with
The production executing means is
A specific image can be displayed when the specific effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. A part that displays character A, and displays friendly character B and enemy character B if the reach performance of super reach β2 is being performed),
End the motion of the movable body in the suggestive effect a predetermined period before the timing of starting the motion of the movable body in the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, the movable body A portion where the movable body action suggestion effect ends before the period T3 from the start of execution of the action effect),
The predetermined period is a period longer than a period during which one unit action is repeatedly performed by the movable body, and a period shorter than a period in which the movable body is repeatedly moved in the suggestive effect (for example, FIG. 10). -21 to FIG. 10-24, the period T3 is longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position),
The operation period of the movable body in the specific effect is longer than the period in which the movable body is repeatedly operated in the suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, period T3 is , a portion that is shorter than the period T2 during which the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and an advantageous state is obtained when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of super reach β2, in which friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect, A portion where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the action in the specific effect from being misidentified as the action in the suggestive effect, and the period of suggestion becomes longer than the action period of the movable body in the specific effect to be suggested. It is also possible to prevent the loss of interest due to

The game machine of form 11 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R);
A specific effect (for example, a movable body motion effect A or a movable body motion effect B) for announcing the effect result by moving the movable body, and repeatedly moving the movable body before the specific effect is executed. Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a movable body action suggestive effect A or a movable body action suggestive effect B) that suggests that the specific effect will be executed by 10-19 for executing the effect processing during variable display);
with
The production executing means is
A specific image can be displayed when the specific effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. A part that displays character A, and displays friendly character B and enemy character B if the reach performance of super reach β2 is being performed),
End the motion of the movable body in the suggestive effect a predetermined period before the timing of starting the motion of the movable body in the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, the movable body A portion where the movable body action suggestion effect ends before the period T3 from the start of execution of the action effect),
During the predetermined period, at least the first low visibility state in which the visibility of the background image is low (for example, as a modification 109SG-4, after the movable body motion suggestion rendering and the enlarged display period are over, the movable body motion rendering or deviation notification In the period until the start timing of the effect, the contrast and brightness in the image display device 5 are set to the first low visibility state lower than before the end of the enlarged display period),
When the movable body starts to operate after the predetermined period, it is set to a second low visibility state whose visibility is even lower than that of the first low visibility state (for example, as modification 109SG04, contrast and brightness in the image display device 5 from the first low visibility state to a second low visibility state, which further reduces the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and an advantageous state is obtained when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of super reach β2, in which friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect, A portion where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that it is the predetermined period, and it is possible to increase attention to the action of the movable body in the specific effect.

The gaming machine according to mode 12,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R);
A specific effect (for example, a movable body motion effect A or a movable body motion effect B) for announcing the effect result by moving the movable body, and repeatedly moving the movable body before the specific effect is executed. Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a movable body action suggestive effect A or a movable body action suggestive effect B) that suggests that the specific effect will be executed by 10-19 for executing the effect processing during variable display);
with
The production executing means is
A specific image is displayed when the specific effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is being executed, and the specific image can be gradually enlarged and displayed while the suggestive effect is being executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-32 and FIG. 10-34, when the reach effect of super reach β1 is being performed, the ally character B and the enemy character A are displayed, and these ally character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed. , and the part where friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach performance of super reach β2, and these friendly character B and enemy character B are enlarged and displayed),
End the motion of the movable body in the suggestive effect a predetermined period before the timing of starting the motion of the movable body in the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, the movable body A portion where the movable body action suggestion effect ends before the period T3 from the start of execution of the action effect),
Before the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in Modified Example 109SG-1, the movement of the ally character and the enemy character is started before the enlarged display is started). The part that executes the body movement suggestion production),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and an advantageous state is obtained when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of super reach β2, in which friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect, A portion where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that it is the predetermined period, and it is possible to increase attention to the repeated motion of the movable body in the suggestive effect.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 9 to 12,
The movable body has a light-emitting part capable of emitting light (for example, movable body LED109SG495),
The effect execution means controls the light emitting unit to be in a non-light emitting state during the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. Part that turns off the movable body LED 109SG495 during the period until the start of the deviation notification effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that it is the predetermined period in which the movable body is not operating.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to forms 1 to 13,
The movable bodies include a first movable body (eg, first movable body 109SG401) and a second movable body (eg, second movable body 109SG402L and third movable body 109SG402R) that can operate independently of the first movable body. and
The production executing means is
In the repetitive motion of the suggestive effect, only one of the first movable body and the second movable body is operated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, movable body motion suggestive effect B Then, the part that operates only the first movable body 109SG401),
In the action of the specific effect, both the first movable body and the second movable body are operated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, in the movable body action effect B, the 1 movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and the part that operates all of the third movable body 109SG402R)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily distinguish whether the motion of the movable body is the motion of the suggestive effect or the motion of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to forms 1 to 14,
The movable body has a light-emitting part capable of emitting light (eg, movable body LED109SG495),
The production executing means is
When the specific image is being gradually enlarged and displayed, the light emitting unit is caused to emit light at a first luminance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first enlarged display period, During the enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period, the portion where the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1),
At least during the period in which the effect result is notified in the specific effect, the light emitting unit is caused to emit light at a second luminance higher than the first luminance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23 , a portion that causes the movable body LED 109SG495 to emit light with a luminance C2 that is higher than the luminance C1 during execution of the movable body motion presentation)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier to recognize that it is the period in which the effect result is shown, and the interest of the period can be improved.

The game machine of form 16 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R);
A specific effect (for example, a movable body motion effect A or a movable body motion effect B) for announcing the effect result by moving the movable body, and repeatedly moving the movable body before the specific effect is executed. Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a movable body action suggestive effect A or a movable body action suggestive effect B) that suggests that the specific effect will be executed by 10-19 for executing the effect processing during variable display);
with
The production executing means is
A specific image is displayed when the specific effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is being executed, and the specific image can be gradually enlarged and displayed while the suggestive effect is being executed. As shown in 10-32 and FIG. 10-34, when the reach effect of super reach β1 is being performed, the ally character B and the enemy character A are displayed, and these ally character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed. , and if during the reach performance of super reach β2, ally character B and enemy character B are displayed, and these ally character B and enemy character B are enlarged and displayed).
When moving the movable body in the suggestive effect, a different type of effect image can be displayed in the specific effect from the effect image displayed when the movable body is in motion (for example, , as a modified example 109SG-5, a portion that displays different effect images on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body action effect and during execution of the movable body action effect),
In the suggestive effect, the number of types of effect images displayed when the movable body is operated is greater than the number of types of effect images displayed when the movable body is operated in the specific effect. (For example, as modification 109SG-5, the number of types of effect images to be displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion effect. The part that increases the number of types of effect images that are displayed),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and an advantageous state is obtained when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of super reach β2, in which friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect, A portion where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during the suggestive effect in which actions are repeated, many kinds of effect images are displayed, so that the interest in the suggestive effect can be improved.

The game machine of form 17 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R);
A specific effect (for example, a movable body motion effect A or a movable body motion effect B) for announcing the effect result by moving the movable body, and repeatedly moving the movable body before the specific effect is executed. Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a movable body action suggestive effect A or a movable body action suggestive effect B) that suggests that the specific effect will be executed by 10-19 for executing the effect processing during variable display);
with
The production executing means is
In the suggestive effect, it is possible to display a suggested action corresponding image corresponding to the action of the movable body (for example, as modification 109SG-6, during execution of the movable body action suggestive effect, the movable body The part that displays the image corresponding to the action suggestion effect of the movable body corresponding to the action suggestion effect),
In the specific effect, it is possible to display an effect action corresponding image corresponding to the action of the movable body (for example, as modification 109SG-6, during execution of the movable body action effect, the movable body action is displayed on the image display device 5 A portion that displays an image different from the movable body motion suggestive effect corresponding image as a movable body motion effect corresponding image corresponding to the effect),
The period during which the suggested action corresponding image is displayed is different from the period during which the effect action corresponding image is displayed (for example, as modification 109SG-6, the display period of the movable body action suggestive effect corresponding image and the movable body action corresponding image are displayed). The part that changes the display period of the image),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and an advantageous state is obtained when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of super reach β2, in which friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect, A portion where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display period of the suggested action corresponding image and the effect action corresponding image can be a period corresponding to each action of the movable body.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to form 17,
When displaying the effect action corresponding image, the effect execution means controls the visibility to be reduced to a low visibility state (for example, as a modification 109SG-6, the movable body action effect corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5 A portion that lowers the visibility of the image corresponding to the movable body action effect by lowering the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 when displaying)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase attention to the movable body that operates in the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to form 17 or form 18,
The production executing means is
During the period in which the suggested action corresponding image is displayed, a suggestive action corresponding sound corresponding to the suggested action corresponding image can be output (for example, as modification 109SG-6, the image display device 5 can output the suggestive action corresponding image is displayed, a portion for outputting a sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestive effect corresponding to the movable body motion suggestive effect corresponding image from the speaker 8L8R),
During the period in which the effect action corresponding image is displayed, a effect sound different from the suggestive action corresponding sound and corresponding to the effect action corresponding image can be output (for example, as a modification 109SG-6 , when the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body action effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body action effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body action effect is output from the speaker 8L8R)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to each displayed corresponding image.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 17 to 19,
The effect execution means is characterized in that the effect action corresponding image is displayed before the motion start timing of the movable body in the specific effect.
According to this feature, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for the start of the movement of the movable body in the specific effect, and to increase the attention to the movement of the movable body.

The game machine of form 21 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R);
A specific performance (e.g., movable body motion performance A) for notifying the result of performance by operating the movable body, and moving the movable body by displaying a special image before the specific performance is executed. (For example, in the image display device 5, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move at a speed V1 toward the movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1). body motion suggesting effect A);
with
The production executing means is
In the suggestive effect, the special image is displayed in a manner of approaching the movable body at a first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, when the movable body action effect A is executed , a portion where a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 so as to move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1),
In the specific effect, the special image is displayed in a manner in which the special image is separated from the movable body at a second speed faster than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31, the movable When the body movement effect A is executed, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. part),
During the display period of the special image, at least the background image is displayed in a low visibility state with low visibility (for example, as shown in FIGS. is a portion where the images of friendly character A and enemy character A or enemy character B are displayed with a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period),
When the specific effect is being executed, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. A portion that displays character A, and displays friendly character A and enemy character B during the reach performance of super reach α2),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and an advantageous state is obtained when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of super reach β2, in which friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect, A portion where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the special image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special image can be made conspicuous, and by moving the special image, attention can be drawn to the movable body, so that the performance effect of the movement of the movable body can be enhanced, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can.

The game machine of form 22 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R);
A specific effect (e.g., a movable body motion effect A) for announcing the effect result by moving the movable body, and gradually approaching the movable body at a first speed before the specific effect is executed. By displaying a special image, a suggestive effect suggesting that the specific effect is executed without moving the movable body (for example, in the image display device 5, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed at a speed V1. Effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute the movable body motion suggesting effect A) that moves toward the movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 10-19 part) and
with
The production executing means is
In the suggestive effect, the special image is displayed in a manner of repeatedly acting at the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, when the movable body action effect A is executed, the image A portion where a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed in the device 5 so as to move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1),
In the specific effect, the special image is displayed in a manner in which the special image is separated from the movable body at a second speed faster than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31, the movable When the body movement effect A is executed, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. part),
During the display period of the special image, the effect image other than the special image is displayed in a low visibility state with low visibility (for example, as shown in FIGS. During the execution of A, the images of friendly character A and enemy character A or enemy character B are displayed with a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period),
When the specific effect is being executed, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. A portion that displays character A, and displays ally character A and enemy character B during the reach performance of super reach β2),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and an advantageous state is obtained when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of super reach β2, in which friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed during the ready-to-win effect, is controlled by friendly character B and A portion where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the special image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special image can be made conspicuous, and by moving the special image, attention can be drawn to the movable body, so that the performance effect of the movement of the movable body can be enhanced, thereby improving the interest in the game. can.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to form 21 or 22,
The effect executing means hides the special image during a predetermined period immediately before the start timing of the movement of the movable body in the specific effect (as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (F) and 10-30 (F) 2) Before executing the movable body action effect A or the deviation notification effect, the part where the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by hiding the special image, it is possible to easily recognize that the movement of the movable body is started.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 21 to 23,
The first speed is a speed within a predetermined range, and the first speed changes according to the proximity of the special image within the predetermined range (for example, as shown in Modification 109SG-7, the speed V1 is set to a predetermined variable within the range of),
The second speed is a speed faster than the maximum speed in the predetermined range (for example, as shown in Modified Example 109SG-7, the speed of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S during execution of the movable body motion presentation A For V2, the part where the speed is faster than the maximum speed of speed V1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the moving speed of the special image is changed, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 21 to 24,
The production executing means is
It is possible to output a plurality of action sound effects corresponding to the repeated action of the movable body or the action of the special image (for example, a plurality of sounds are output as action suggestive sounds and jackpot notification sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. possible part),
It is possible to output different action sound effects depending on the output timing (for example, multiple output start timings for action suggestive sound and big hit notification sound are provided, and at which timing the output of action suggestive sound and big hit notification sound is started) The part that can output different sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R depending on the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the repetitive motion of the movable body or the motion of the special image is being executed, and the effect sound of the motion changes according to the output timing, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening by tilting the movable wing when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second starting It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be one that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one having an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100 V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. As a result, when the high probability state such as the probability variable state in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, compared to the low probability state such as the normal state or the time saving state, the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is increased. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to emit a prohibit command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but instead, the game media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, it includes a ratio of "0%" for one and a ratio of "100%" or less than "100%" for the other.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 109SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 109SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 109SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 109S, a movable body unit 109SG400 is provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof. .

The movable unit 109SG400 has a base 109SG410 as shown in FIG. 10-3(A). The first movable body 109SG401 is located at the center of the base 109SG410 in the lateral width direction, the second movable body 109SG402L is located at the left of the base 109SG410 in the lateral width direction, and the second movable body 109SG402L is located at the right of the base 109SG410 in the lateral width direction. , the third movable body 109SG402R is arranged respectively.

Further, the movable body unit 109SG400 includes a first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L, and a third moving body unit 109SG400. and a third movable body motor 109SG423 for operating the movable body 109SG402R. Therefore, the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R in the characteristic part 109SG can operate independently from the first movable body 109SG401. Further, a movable body LED 109SG495 is built in a predetermined position of the first movable body 109SG401 (for example, an upper position of the first movable body 109SG401).

Among the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the first movable body 109SG401 is driven by the first movable body motor 109SG421 to move to the retracted position, which is the lower position of the image display device 5. From (see FIG. 10-3(A)), a suggested position above the retracted position (see FIG. 10-3(B)), an effect that is above the suggested position and is also the front position of the image display device 5 It is movable to the position (see FIG. 10-3(C)).

The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are driven by the second movable body motor 109SG422 and the third movable body motor 109SG423 to move to the retracted position below the image display device 5 (FIG. 10). -3 (A)) to the left and right proximity positions (see FIG. 10-3 (C)) of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(C), the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all at the retracted position. The position state is the first state of the movable body unit 109SG400, and the first movable body 109SG401 is positioned at the suggested position, while the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are positioned at the retracted position. The state is the second state of the movable body unit 109SG400, the first movable body 109SG401 is positioned at the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are positioned at the production position. The state in which the movable body unit 109SG400 is located at the left and right close positions is defined as the third state.

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature part 109SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is an effect control command for specifying variable display results such as special symbols and decoration symbols. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "loss" or "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while it is performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, in the normal opening jackpot state and the high speed opening jackpot state described later, corresponding to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "10"), Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a pattern designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a result of determination at the time of winning, the determination result of the big hit type (probability variation or non-probability variation), and whether it will be a small hit. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 10-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this characteristic portion 109SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big hit" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". It is a random value used to determine the , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In the present characteristic unit 109SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 109SG), the probability of being determined by controlling the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 109SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 10-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 109SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 109SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 109SG selects any of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot gaming state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 Special symbol game by special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for judging the jackpot type is “non-probability variable jackpot”, “probability variable jackpot A”, “ It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "variable probability big hit B" and "variable probability big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present characteristic portion 109SG will be described with reference to FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" that are executed and shift to a high-probability high base state, and high-probability low base state in which high-probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time-saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . Then, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds). . In addition, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" and "non-probability variable big win" is repeated twice (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 109SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is set to 0.1 second. It's becoming In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

The high-probability control and the time-saving control executed after the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win is finished are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the jackpot game state is finished. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is a variable-probability big win, the high-probability control and time-saving control are executed again after the big-win game state ends, so that the big-win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state. , a so-called continuous state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 109SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "variable probability big hit A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value of the predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value that is smaller than that of the special game of the first special figure is the big hit type of "variable big hit B" or "variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 10-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 109SG. In this characteristic portion 109SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in the present characteristic portion 109SG, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be provided.

In addition, the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 109SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 109SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 109SG, as described later, the type of the variation pattern is determined first, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random number for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 109SG. In this characterizing section 109SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 jackpot) and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (super reach β2 big hit fluctuation pattern).

Further, when the variable display result is a probability variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is PB1-1 (normal reach big hit variation pattern) and PB1 using the big hit variation pattern determination table A. -2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 jackpot), PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (variation pattern of super reach β2 jackpot) Determine from

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-9, in the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B, while the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 is the same, PB1-2, PB1 -3, PB1-4, and PB1-5 are assigned different numbers of determination values. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 2 in PB1-1, 45 in PB1-2, 150 in PB1-3, 300 in PB1-4, and 500 in PB1-5 values are assigned to each. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, there are two determination values for PB1-1, 30 for PB1-2, 135 for PB1-3, 315 for PB1-4, and 515 for PB1-5. assigned to each. That is, in the characteristic portion 109SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable big hit, the variation pattern is the super reach β1, β2 variation pattern PB1-4 at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable big hit. Alternatively, since PB1-5 is determined, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). do. That is, in this characteristic portion 109SG, since the variable display is performed in the same variation pattern when the variable display result is the probability variable big hit C and when the variable display result is the small win, the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable probability big win C or a small win.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 fluctuation pattern) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α2), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α2), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 deviation) and PA2 −3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α2), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach out of time), PA2-1 (variation pattern out of normal reach), PA2-2 (variation pattern out of super reach α1), PA2-3 (variation pattern out of super reach α2) and PA2 -4 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β1) and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of missing super reach β2).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic unit 109SG is "missing", the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the fact that it is in a time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) increase the rate of variable display execution. , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the variable display of super reach α1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-2, PB1-2) in this characteristic portion 109SG is a special figure variable display time of 40 It is a variable display for executing a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A as a reach effect of super reach. The variable display of super reach α2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-3 and PB1-3) has a special figure variable display time of 50 seconds, and a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character B as a reach effect of super reach. is a variable display that executes The variable display of super reach β1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A as a reach effect of super reach. is a variable display that executes The variable display of super reach β2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A as a reach effect of super reach. is a variable display that executes

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-9, as the jackpot expectations for each variable display in this characteristic portion 109SG, the jackpot expectations for super reach β2 are set to be the highest, and thereafter, super reach β1 and super reach α2 , Super Reach α1, Normal Reach, and Non-Reach are set in order of high expectations for big hits (Expectations for big hits in each variable display in this characteristic portion 109SG: Super Reach β2>Super Reach β1>Super Reach α2>Super Reach α1 > normal reach > non-reach).

In other words, focusing on the variable display of Super Reach, this characteristic portion 109SG determines whether the friendly character displayed as a battle effect (reach effect of Super Reach) is friendly character A or friendly character B. The degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the combination of which of the enemy character A and B the enemy character displayed as the ready-to-win effect is.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 109SG, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-10 is provided. The game control data holding area 109SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 109SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 109SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 109SG153, a game control counter setting unit 109SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 109SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 109SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 109SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 109SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 109SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 109SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 109SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 109SG190 as shown in FIG. It is The production control data holding area 109SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes the production control flag setting unit 109SG191, the production control timer setting unit 109SG192, the production control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the production control buffer setting unit 109SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 109SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 109SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are these starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

Furthermore, in the start-winning reception command buffer 109SG194A of the characteristic unit 109SG, a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending storage display is set is set to the first special figure pending storage and the second special A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the figure reserved storage.

It should be noted that the pending display flag stores "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, When the execution of the reading notice effect is determined, a special mode different from the normal display mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) is set, the reserved memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U. , and in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

At the time of start winning to the first start winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 109SG194A at the time of starting winning (the entry with the youngest buffer number). go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

10-11(B), each time the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing section 109SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described based on FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 109SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 109SGS101a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 109SG154, it should be able to identify the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 109SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 109SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "1" ( step 109 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 109SGS101a (step 109SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 109 SGS 101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 109SGS101b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 109SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit (step 109SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "2" ( step 109 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 109SGS103 and step 109SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 109SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", 1 is added to the first reserved storage number count value, and when the starting buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved storage number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 109SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 109SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. Numerical data representing the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step 109 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 109SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, while when the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 109SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 109SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 109SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 109SGS111, the winning random number value determination processing is executed (step 109SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, etc., the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 109SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 109SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114; Y), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 109SGS115), the processing of step 109SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 109SGS114; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (step 109SGS116), End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-13(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 109 SGS112 of FIG. 10-12 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 109SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIGS. result) is regarded as "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 5, FIGS. 10-12), which will be described later, determination of variation patterns that specifically define the variable display mode of decorative symbols is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at step 109 SGS 112 when winning a prize. As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot pattern is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of the machine 1 (step 109SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is the time saving state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 109SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 109SGS109 in FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 109SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 109 SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each determination It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the jackpot determination range in step 109SGS123, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not hit the jackpot (step 109SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 2 is selected and set (step 109 SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 109SGS109 in FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 109SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 109 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the event (step 109SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 109SGS127), and proceed to step 109SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 109 SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 109SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 109SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 109SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 109 SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the characteristic unit 109SG includes a deviation variation pattern determination table B that is used when the number of pending memories is 3. , and the deviation variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. , In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. In the variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and the variation pattern determination table for loss In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to non-reach variation patterns within the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 97 judgment values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach out of the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. .

Therefore, in step 109SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

In addition, when it is determined in step 109SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 109SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-13(A) , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 109 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command corresponding to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in the probability variation jackpot B, and the probability variation jackpot C in the case of the probability variation jackpot C Executes transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, executes the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 109 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (Step 109 SGS 134a). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 109SGS134a; Y), select and set a jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 109SGS135), and step Go to 109SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot (step 109SGS134a; N), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B (step 109SGS136), and proceed to step 109SGS138.

After executing any of the processing of step 109SGS127, step 109SGS130, step 109SGS131, step 109SGS135, and step 109SGS136, a numerical value indicating each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination data, a variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the random number MR3 (step 109SGS138). In this characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIG. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode (for example, normal reach) other than "non-reach" and "super reach" A variable category of "other" is provided, It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 109SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 109SGS132), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. 10-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 109 SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 109 SGS221; N), the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command in step 109SGS221 (step 109SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 109 SGS222).

If the received command is not the first starting opening winning designation command at step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS224).

At step 109SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 109SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 109SGS226 (step 109SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 109SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS228).

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command at step 109SGS228 (step 109SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 109SGS230).

If the received command in step 109SGS222 is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command is the second starting opening winning designation command in step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; Y), in step 109SGS226 If the received command is a pattern designation command (step 109SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; Y), then in step 109SGS228 the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (109SGS228; Y), if the received command is the second pending storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; Y), the received command is stored in the empty space in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. Store at the beginning of the area (step 109SGS233), and return to the processing of step 109SGS221.

In addition, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 109SG194A when starting winning.

In step 109SGS230, if the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 109SGS234), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis processing of this characteristic part 109SG, if the received command is any of the starting entrance winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the pending memory number notification command, the received command is Although the form of sequentially storing from the beginning of the empty area of the received command buffer 109SG194A is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the received command is the first start winning prize designation command, the pending storage number notification command If a pending memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry pending memory that has not received the pending memory number notification command It may be set outside the target of the reading notice effect.

FIG. 10-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-15, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS241), and there is no pending memory (entry) in which the pending display flag is not set. It is determined whether or not there is (step 109 SGS242a). If there is no pending memory where the pending display flag is not set (step 109SGS242a; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is pending storage where the pending display flag is not set (step 109SGS242a; Y), Furthermore, it is determined whether or not a super reach performance is being executed (step 109 SGS242b).

Whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super reach is being executed depends on whether the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (whether or not the variable display is being executed) and the value of the effect control process flag. is 2, it is sufficient to refer to the contents of the process data of the variable display being executed and determine whether or not the ready-to-reach effect of super-reach is being executed.

If the reach effect of super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, and if the reach effect of super reach is not being executed (step 109SGS242bb; N), the entry (the pending display flag is It is determined whether or not the symbol designation command stored in the entry not set is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109 SGS243a). If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, where the symbol designation command stored in the entry indicates a win or a big hit. If it is a design designation command (step 109SGS243a; N), it is determined whether or not the design designation command stored in the entry is the first design designation command (design designation command indicating loss) (step 109SGS243b). .

If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a big hit (step 109 SGS243b; N), The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 109 SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the prediction effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 and the jackpot type specified in step 109SGS244, prefetching at the time of jackpot (not shown) By referring to the notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the read advance notice effect and the display pattern in the case of executing the read advance notice effect (step 109 SGS245).

In step 109 SGS245, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 10-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 10-16, depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 109 SGS244, the presence or absence of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (prediction type) are varied.

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (preview type) of the pre-reading preview effect. Among these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display. It is displayed in area 109SG005U.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-16, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot", the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is set too high. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the rate at which the display pattern α is determined.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the probability variable big hit, and the player's expectation for the probability variable big win can be enhanced.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is always determined to display the pending memory display as a white square (◇) or a white star. Although one of the display patterns β displayed in the shape (☆) is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, the variable Similar to the case where the display result is "missing", a case may be provided in which it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect.

Further, in step 109SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is ON is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a failure (step 109SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The variation category indicated by the variation category designation command of the entry whose flag is ON is specified (step 109 SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command of the entry is C600H, it specifies that it is a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is specified and C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation pattern including normal reach.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading announcement effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the category of the variation pattern specified in step 109SGS247 (not shown) Whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the display pattern (notice type) in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect are determined by referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table (step 109 SGS248).

In step 109 SGS248, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 10-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-16, depending on the category of the variation pattern specified in the process of step 109 SGS247, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (preview type) are changed. there is

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (notice type). Of these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is a white square (◇), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area. 109SG005U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005D. It is displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U. Incidentally, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be non-execution, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U in a round shape (○) which is the normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 10-16, when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "not The rate at which the pre-reading forewarning effect is executed (the rate determined for other than "no forewarning effect") is set higher than in the case of "ready to reach". In addition, when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", it is more likely than the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "others". The rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed (the rate at which other than "no notice effect" is determined) is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", if the fluctuation category is "other", than if the fluctuation pattern category is "non-reach" Also, the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the percentage of display pattern α determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "others". Furthermore, when the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach" when the category of the variation pattern is "others". The percentage of display pattern β determined is set higher than in the case, and when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other" The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach" is set to be the highest, and the rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to be the lowest.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no notice effect), the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executed, and the display pattern α Alternatively, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined in any variation pattern category when the variable display result is "mismatch".

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "loss (non-reach)", "loss (super reach)", or "loss (other)", the display pattern α is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot (probability variable jackpot)", when execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than

With such settings, when the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable big hit". Since the ratio of the number of times when the number of times is increased increases, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.

After executing step 109SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 109SGS247, that is, the display pattern (preview type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. (Step 109SGS249).

After execution of step 109 SGS245 or when execution of pre-reading advance notice effect is determined (step 109 SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 109 SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the pending memory display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Further, in step 109SGS249, if the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect is not determined (step 109SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "o" (step 109SGS250), go to step 109SGS252.

Also, as described above, during execution of the reach effect of super reach (step 109SGS242b; Y), or when the symbol designation command of the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a), the entry of the entry After setting the pending display flag to "0" indicating a white "o" (step 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the pending display based on the stored contents of the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to one of "0", "1" and "2" set in the pending display flag. be. Also, when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A are shifted, the contents stored in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A after the shift are changed to FIG. 10-17. As shown, the reserved display of the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-17, if the number of first special figure pending storage is one, one pending storage display is displayed. As for the display form of this reserved memory display, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display form of "O" as shown in FIG. 10-17. , When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", the display mode of "☆" is displayed. In addition, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is two, two pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode corresponding to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D. Also, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is three, three pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D. Also, if the number of first special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D.

In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. displayed in the form. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is two, for example, as shown in FIG. As a mode according to the flag value set in the flag, for example, the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U is displayed in the display mode where the reserved memory display of 1 is "○" and the reserved memory display of 1 is displayed in the display mode of "☆". Is displayed. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is three, three pending storage display is displayed, each pending storage display mode corresponding to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, in accordance with the decrease (consumption) of the reserved memory, the reserved memory display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (screen center).

In other words, if the pending memory of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A is shifted by consuming the pending memory in the variable display start setting process to be described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, the variable display starting time after the shift is shifted. Based on the pending memory of the received command buffer 109SG194A, the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new pending memory due to the start winning. , the display pattern of the reserved memory is determined and set to the reserved display flag, and the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005D are displayed in a display mode according to the flag value set to the reserved display flag. It will be displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U.

In addition, in this characterizing section 109SG, the form of executing the processing of step 109SGS252 in the pre-reading notice setting processing is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D And the process for updating the pending display of the second pending storage display area 109SG005U may be executed separately as a process (for example, pending display update process) different from the pre-reading notice setting process.

Further, in step 109SG242, the characterizing section 109SG determines execution or non-execution of the pre-reading announcement effect in the pending memory in the starting winning on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning. New storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 109SGS242 due to the simultaneous occurrence of the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening If it is determined that there is, that is, if the entry whose display undecided flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage, both entries are pre-read notice It is a target for determining whether to execute the performance or not. Both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the first special plan is newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special plan are newly stored are stored depending on the execution and non-execution of the advance notice effect. In the case of a determination target, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the pending display of the pending storage of the first special symbol and the pending display of the second special symbol There is a case where the pre-reading forewarning effects are simultaneously executed in both displays.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 109SG, as described above, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is Both the newly stored pending memory and the newly stored pending memory command at the time of starting winning in the second special figure are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect, but the present invention is this In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan Only one of them may be determined to execute.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special symbol is suspended in the second special symbol. Priority is given to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading foretelling effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan is unambiguously determined to be non-execution, and the first special plan When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution and non-execution of pre-reading notice effect in pending storage in the second special figure is determined with priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice performance in the reserved storage in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan, it is unambiguously decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, and the second special plan When it is determined not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

10-18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 109 SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 109SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A The various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 109 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off at step 109SGS271 (step 109SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A, one buffer number It is shifted upward by minutes (step 109 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 109SGS272 or step 109SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 109SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 109SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable probability big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, selects a decoration pattern in which 3 patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

And, in step 109SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 109 SGS282).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 109SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 109 SGS284). Also, the first time is set in the variable display control timer (step 109SGS285). The first time is, for example, 33 ms, and every time the first time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 stores image data during variable display, including image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns, in the VRAM. The write/display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal. As a result, the variable display of decorative patterns and the display of moving images of other effects are realized (see FIGS. 10-20).

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (step 109 SGS287). If the variable display variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287; Y), the movable body control timer is set to the second time (step 109SGS288). The second time is, for example, 1 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 operates the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 each time the first time elapses. control. Thereby, movement control of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is realized (see FIG. 10-20).

After step 109SGS288 is executed, or if the variation pattern of the variable display is not the super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287; N), the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 109 SGS286).

FIG. 10-19 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer (step 109SGS301, step 109SGS302, step 109SGS303). If the variable display is super reach variable display (step 109SGS303b; Y), the value of the movable body control timer is decremented by 1 (step 109SGS303c).

After step 109SGS303c is executed, or if it is not super reach variable display (step 109SGS303b; N), the process proceeds to step 109SGS306.

At step 109 SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 109 SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 109 SGS308). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 109SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (for performance component) is executed (step 109SGS309b).

After executing the process of step 109SGS309a or step 109SGS309b, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f).

If the variable display is super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; Y), it is further determined whether or not the movable body control timer has timed out (109SGS309g). When the movable body control timer has timed out (step 109SGS309g; Y), the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 are driven according to the contents of the process data. (Step 109SGS309h). Then, the movable body control timer is reset (the second time is set in the movable body control timer again), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 (step 109SGS309i).

If the variable display is not super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; N) and if the movable body control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS309g; N), the processing of steps 109SGS309h and 109SGS309i is executed. without proceeding to step 109 SGS310.

Next, it is checked whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen (33 ms The image data of the screen to be displayed after the elapse of time is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 109 SGS311). In this manner, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of decorative patterns and display control of other images (display control of moving images). The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variation of the decorative design. Also, the variable display control timer is reset to the first time (step 109 SGS312).

Further, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS310; N), after executing step 109SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable display time timer has timed out (step 109SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 109 SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination designation command is received is in the ON state (step 109 SGS314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the fluctuation. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer for the last process data n expires in the process of step 109 SGS306, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and decorative pattern variable display control based on the process table is performed. ends.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device during the reach effect of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 in the characteristic portion 109SG will be described. Rendering modes of variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, for the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach α2, when the reach effects of super reach α1 and super reach α2 are started, the first enlarged display period is started. , Character images displayed on the image display device 5 during the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period If there is, ally character A and enemy character B) are enlarged and displayed.

Specifically, in the first enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged at a constant speed from the normal display magnification (1 time) to the display magnification m1, and in the second enlarged display period, the character image is displayed from the display magnification m1. The character image is enlarged at a constant speed up to the magnification m2, and in the third enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged from the display magnification m2 to the display magnification m3 at a constant speed. After the end of the third enlarged display period, the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 for a predetermined period, and the display magnification of the character image is returned to the normal display magnification at the timing when the predetermined period has passed. .

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period are all of the same length. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, among the differences between the display magnifications, the difference between the normal display magnification and the display magnification m1 is the largest, and the difference between the display magnification m2 and the display magnification m3 is the largest. is the smallest. That is, in this characteristic portion 109SG, the character image enlargement speed is set to be the fastest during the first enlargement display period and the slowest during the third enlargement display period (character image enlargement speed: first enlarged display period>second enlarged display period>third enlarged display period). In addition, in the characterizing portion 109SG, “fast enlargement speed” means that the image enlargement rate per unit time is high.

Thereafter, in this characteristic portion 109SG, a period T2 is a period (a period during which the movable body action suggestive effect is executed) combining the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period described above, and the third enlarged display period and the character image are displayed. A period including the predetermined period during which the display magnification is maintained at m3 may be referred to as a period T3.

As shown in FIG. 10-21, during the reach performance of super reach α1 and super reach α2, if the result of the variable display is a big hit, the As an effect to notify that the variable display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving to the close position (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved. A movable body motion effect A is executed to move the movable body unit 109SG400 to the retracted position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-22, during the ready-to-reach effect of super reach α1 and super reach α2, if the variable display result is wrong, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure.

Henceforth, in this characterizing part 109SG, the period during which the movable body effect A and the deviation notification effect are executed may be referred to as a period T4. Among these periods T2 to T4, the period T3 is the shortest period and the period T4 is the longest period (the length of the periods T2 to T4: period T4>period T2>period T3).

In addition, during the ready-to-reach performances of super reach α1 and super reach α2, effect images are also displayed on the image display device 5 as movable body motion suggestion performance A and movable body motion performance A (only when the variable display result is a big hit). .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, in the image display device 5, the first movable body A movable body motion suggesting production A is executed in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward 109SG401 at a speed V1.

Furthermore, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2 over a period T4 as part of the above-described movable body motion presentation A. It moves (diffuses) toward the edge of the display device 5 . Note that the absolute value of the speed V2 is greater than the absolute value of the speed V1. In other words, the movable body action effect A in the characterizing part 109SG is also an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S moves faster than the movable body action suggestive effect A.

Further, during the reach performance of super reach α1 and super reach α2, light emission of the movable body LED 109SG495 is also executed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the movable body LED 109SG495 is in the middle of the above-described period T2 (the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period) and period T3 (more precisely is the start timing of the first enlarged display period to the end timing of the third enlarged display period), the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1. Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light with a luminance C2 higher than the luminance C1 over a period T4.

In addition, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, four types of performance sounds can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R: BGM such as music, SE (sound effect), action suggestive sound, and big hit notification sound. , and the type of sound output differs depending on the time during the reach production.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the BGM is the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R only during the period T3. output is stopped. That is, the output of BGM in the ready-to-win effect is executed over the period T4 from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect to the end timing of the period T2.

Also, SE (sound effect) is a dramatic sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, like BGM, but unlike BGM, there is no period during which output from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. . In other words, the SE output in the ready-to-win effect is performed throughout the ready-to-win effect.

The motion suggestive sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body motion suggestive production A. That is, the action suggesting sound is output only during the period T2 during which the movable body action suggesting effect A is executed, and is not output during the other periods. The big hit notification sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body motion presentation A. In other words, the big hit notification sound is output only during the period T4 during which the movable body action effect A is executed when the variable display result is a big win, and is not output during the other periods.

As shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24, for the variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2, when the reach effects of super reach β1 and super reach β2 are started, the first enlarged display period and the second Character images displayed on the image display device 5 during the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (in the case of the reach effect of super reach β1, friendly character B and enemy character A; Enlarged display of ally character B and enemy character B) is performed.

Fig. 10- 21 and FIGS. 10-22, the description of which is the same as the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach α2 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, during the reach effect of super reach β1 and super reach β2, if the variable display result is a big hit, the variable As an effect informing that the display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the close position of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to their retracted positions. A movable body action effect B to move (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state) is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-24, during the ready-to-reach effect of super reach β1 and super reach β2, if the variable display result is wrong, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure. The movable object effect B is an effect that is executed over the period T4, like the movable object effect A and the failure notification effect described above.

Also, during the reach effects of super reach β1 and super reach β2, as shown in FIGS. A movable body motion suggesting effect B is executed in which the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly moved (reciprocated) between the retracted position and the suggested position. Note that the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position in the movable body motion suggesting effect B is shorter than the aforementioned period T3 ( Length of period T1 to period T4: period T4>period T2>period T3>period T1).

As described above, in variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, as shown in FIG. While the action suggesting effect is executed, the movable body action suggesting effect is not executed during the third enlarged display period. Among the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is the fastest in the first enlarged display period (the image enlargement ratio per unit time is large), and the character image enlargement rate is the highest in the first enlarged display period. During the enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is set to be the slowest (image enlargement rate per unit time is small).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-26(A), when the movable body motion suggesting effect A and the movable body motion suggesting effect B are compared, the movable body motion suggesting effect A is a star-shaped effect image on the image display device 5. 109SG005S repeatedly acts on the first movable body 109SG401 (a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1), and the first movable body 109SG401 itself. does not move, whereas the movable body motion suggesting effect B is different in that the first movable body 109SG401 repeatedly moves between the retracted position and the suggestive position. On the other hand, both the movable body motion suggesting effect A and the movable body motion suggesting effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1 during the execution period of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-26(B), comparing the movable body action effect A and the movable body action effect B, the movable body action effect A moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retracted position to the effect position. , move the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R to the close position of the first movable body moved to the effect position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and This is an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S spreads from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed of V2. In the movable body motion effect B, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the effected position and then moved to the first movable body approach position. It is an effect of moving (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S diffusing from the first movable body 109SG401 at the speed V2 is not executed. This is different from the movable body motion presentation A. Further, both the movable body motion effect A and the movable body motion effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C1 during the execution period of the effect.

Next, the display mode of the ready-to-win effect on the image display device 5 in variable display of super-reach α1, super-to-reach α2, super-to-win β1, and super-to-win β2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-27 to 10-35.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (A) and 10-27 (B), after a while from the start of the variable display of any one of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, , and the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L and the "right" decorative design display area 5R stop at a combination indicating reach. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the state of reach, if the variable display is the variable display of super reach α1, a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character A is started as a reach effect (FIG. 10-27 (C ) and FIG. 10-28(A)), if the variable display is the super reach α2 variable display, a battle effect between friend character A and enemy character B is started as a reach effect (see FIGS. 10-27(D) and 10-28(A)). FIG. 10-30 (A)), if the variable display is super reach β1 variable display, a battle effect between friend character B and enemy character A is started as a reach effect (FIGS. 10-27 (E) and 10 -32 (A)), if the variable display is a super reach β2 variable display, a battle effect between friendly character B and enemy character B is started as a reach effect (Fig. 10-27 (F) and Fig. 10- 34(A)).

At the start of the ready-to-win performance of these super ready-to-win, the decorative symbols displayed in the “left” decorative design display area 5L and the “right” decorative design display area 5R are displayed at the upper left and right ends of the display area of the image display device 5. The decorative patterns displayed in the display area 5Cni of the "middle" decorative patterns become temporarily invisible.

As shown in FIGS. 10-28 (A) and 10-28 (B), in the latter half of the battle production, which is the reach production of super reach α1, as shown in FIG. Display of a moving image in which character A attacks enemy character A is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-28(C) to 10-28(F), the friendly character A is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character A is about to be attacked by melee, the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-28(D) to 10-28(F)), the images of friendly character A and enemy character A are displayed first on image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figs. 10-28 (A) to 10-28 (C)), and overlaps the images of friendly character A and enemy character A with these low contrasts. , an image in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move at a speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body action suggestive effect A) is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, so that the player can see the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V1 and the first movable body 109SG401. It is easy to recognize the movement toward.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28(E) to 10-28(F), when the third enlarged display period has passed, the friend character A and the enemy character A are displayed at a display magnification of m3 for a predetermined period of time. to display. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 10-29(H) and 10-29(I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the player character A and the enemy character are displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body action effect A. An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character A, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. An effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. be.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character A's attack hits enemy character A on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 10-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As shown in FIGS. 10-30 (A) and 10-30 (B), when the second half of the battle production (reach production) as the reach production of super reach α2 is reached, the state shown in FIG. 10-30 (C) is reached. Thus, display of a moving image in which friendly character A attacks enemy character B is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-30(C) to 10-30(F), the friendly character A is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character B is about to be attacked by melee, the images of the friend character A and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-30(D) to 10-30(F)), the images of friend character A and enemy character B are displayed first on image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figs. 10-30(A) to 10-30(C)), and overlaps the images of friendly character A and enemy character B with these low contrasts. , an image in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move at a speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body action suggestive effect A) is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, so that the player can see the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V1 and the first movable body 109SG401. It is easy to recognize the movement toward.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friend character A and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 10-31(G) to 10-31(I), when the variable display result is a big hit, a friendly character A and an enemy character are displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as a movable body motion effect A. An effect image 109SG005B of an explosion is displayed overlapping the image of the character B, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. An effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. be.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character A's attack hits enemy character B on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 10-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As shown in FIGS. 10-32 (A) and 10-32 (B), when the second half of the battle production (reach production) is reached as a reach production of super reach β1, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (C) At this time, display of a moving image of friendly character B attacking enemy character A starts. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-32(C) to 10-32(F), the friendly character B is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character A is about to be attacked by a close-range attack, the images of the friend character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggesting effect B (movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state of 109SG400 and the change from the second state to the first state are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32(D) and 10-32(E), during the enlarged display period of the images of friend character B and enemy character A, effect image 109SG005X is displayed on image display device 5, Enlarged display of the images of friend character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friend character B and the enemy character A are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33(G) to 10-33(I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the player character B and the enemy character are displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect B. An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the character A image.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character B's attack hits enemy character A on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 10-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As shown in FIGS. 10-34 (A) and 10-34 (B), when the second half of the battle production (reach production) as the reach production of super reach β2 is reached, as shown in FIG. 10-34 (C) At that time, display of a moving image in which ally character B attacks enemy character B starts. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(C) to 10-34(F), the friendly character B is displayed during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period. In a scene where the enemy character B is about to be attacked by melee, the images of the friend character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggesting effect B (movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state of 109SG400 and the change from the second state to the first state are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(D) and 10-34(E), during the enlarged display period of the images of friend character B and enemy character A, effect image 109SG005X is displayed on image display device 5, Enlarged display of the images of friend character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light with the luminance C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-34(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friend character B and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-35(G) to 10-35(I), when the result of the variable display is a big win, the player character B is displayed at the center of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect B. , and an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the enemy character B, and a plurality of stars move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. A model effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the rendering position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right proximity positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the rendering position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the motion of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body Moving image in which body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R complete movement to each retreat position, and friendly character B's attack hits enemy character B on image display device 5, and friendly character A wins. is executed, and it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the big win as a variable display result. After moving at a high speed from the back side of the device 5 toward the front side, it stops at the central portion of the image display device 5 while swinging.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop with a combination indicating a big win), the game is controlled to a big win game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIGS. An action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is displayed, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state (lost).
At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. 10-29 (I) at a lower speed than when the big hit is made), and after moving from above the image display device 5, it stops at the center of the image display device 5 while swinging.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 109SG does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion performance B, as shown in 10-31 to FIG. 10-35. On the other hand, during execution of the movable body motion effect B, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, so that the display of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion enlarges the image of the friend character and the enemy character during the reach effect. Since it is possible to make the display and the effect motion of the movable body motion effect B by the movable bodies (the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R) more conspicuous, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the speed of enlarging the image of each character differs between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period. Since the motion speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the control load of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion presentation can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the enlargement speed is slower in the second enlargement display period than in the first enlargement display period, and the third enlargement display period is Since the enlargement speed is slower than that of the second enlargement display period, the enlargement display of the images of the ally character and the enemy character is continued even after the movable body motion suggesting effect is finished, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in this characteristic portion 109SG, an example is given in which the enlargement speed is the fastest during the first enlargement display period and the enlargement speed is the slowest during the third enlargement display period, but the present invention is not limited to this. The enlargement speed may be the fastest in the third enlargement display period, the enlargement speed in the first enlargement display period may be the slowest, or the enlargement speed in the second enlargement display period may be the fastest.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted during the ready-to-win effect including the enlarged display period, so the execution of the pre-reading notice effect draws the player's attention to the ready-to-win effect. can be prevented from declining. In addition, in this characteristic portion 109SG, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted throughout the execution period of the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading notice effect is performed. The period during which the execution is restricted may be only part of the ready-to-win effect (for example, only the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period). In addition, in the feature part 109SG, as a mode for limiting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, a form is illustrated in which the pre-reading notice effect is not executed during the reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect is not limited to this. During the effect, the pre-reading notice effect may be executed at a lower rate than other periods.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the player can visually recognize the ready-to-win effect during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect B, but as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35 Furthermore, during execution of the movable body action effect B, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, thereby reducing the visibility of the ready-to-win effect. In other words, since the visibility of the effect image of the reach effect (images of the ally character and the enemy character) changes according to the action status of the first movable body 109SG401, the action of the first movable body 109SG401 can be used as the effect suggesting the action of the movable body. It is possible to make it easy to understand whether it is an action or an action as a movable body action effect, and it is possible to adjust the degree of attention of the first movable body 109SG401 and the ready-to-win effect effect image.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, during execution of the movable body motion suggestive presentation, BGM, SE, and action suggestive sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the movable body motion presentation is executed. During the middle, BGM, SE, and a jackpot notification sound are output from the speakers 8L, 8R, so before and after the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable object action effect, the output from the speakers 8L, 8R is performed. The player can easily recognize that the effect sound is changing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the period T3 is a period longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position. Since the period T3 is a period shorter than the period T2 during which the movable body action suggestion effect is executed, the action of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body action suggestion effect is the same as the action of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body action suggestion effect. It is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood as , and increase the interest in the game by making the movable body motion suggestion performance execution period longer than the movable body motion performance execution period in the suggested ready-to-win performance. decline can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, by turning off the movable body LED 109SG495 during the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start of the movable body motion effect or the deviation notification effect, the movable body LED 109SG495 is off, the player can easily recognize that the first movable body 109SG401 is not operating.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, in the movable body motion suggestion effect B, only the first movable body 109SG401 is operated, and as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, the movable body In the action effect B, since all of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are operated, it is possible to determine whether the action of the movable body is a motion suggesting the action of the movable body or the effect of the action of the movable body. It is possible for the player to easily distinguish whether or not the action is also an action.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light with the luminance C1, and the movable body motion presentation is performed. During execution, the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light with the luminance C2 which is higher than the luminance C1, so that the player can easily recognize that the movable body action presentation is being executed by the luminance of the movable body LED 109SG495. , the amusement of the game can also be improved during execution of the movable body motion presentation.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect A, the image display device 5 displays a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, and other ready-to-reach effects are displayed. Effect images (images of ally character A and enemy character A or enemy character B) are displayed with a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period, that is, during execution of movable body action suggestive effect A, effect image of ready-to-reach effect. , the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S can be made conspicuous, and the movement of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S at the speed V1 can draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the motion of the first movable body 109SG401.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31, when the movable body action effect A is executed, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 at a speed V2, which is higher than the speed V1. is displayed so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S can be made conspicuous in the movable body motion presentation A, and these Since the movement of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V2 can draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the action of the first movable body 109SG401, thereby increasing the interest in the game. can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28(F) and 10-30(F), the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5 before the movable body action effect A or the deviation notification effect is executed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the effect to be executed from now on is the movable body motion effect or the failure notification effect.

Although the characteristic portion 109SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. included.

For example, in the characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) are the same. , the start timing of the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 and the start timing of enlarged display of the effect image (image of the friend character and the enemy character) of the ready-to-win effect are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the movable body motion suggestive presentation and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) may be different. In particular, when the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect is set to be earlier than the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period), the reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggesting effect is performed. player's attention.

Further, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 after the end of the enlarged display period is substantially the same as the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period (the display magnification is slightly different). only), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as modification 109SG-2, after the enlarged display period ends, a specific effect is displayed on the image display device 5 , an effect image, or the like may be displayed so that the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period is different. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the enlarged display period has ended after the enlarged display period has ended.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the image display device 5 can display an explosion effect image 109SG005B corresponding to the actions of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R during the ready-to-win effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-3, the image display device 5 displays the The effect image may be displayed.

In this way, when the image display device 5 can display both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion corresponding to the motion of the movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production, The size of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion may differ from that of the effect image according to the progress of the battle production. By doing so, the image display device 5 can display an effect image of an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the motion of the movable body and the battle performance during the ready-to-win performance, so that the game interest can be improved. .

Furthermore, if the image display device 5 can display both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion corresponding to the movement of the movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production, the effect of the explosion corresponding to the movement of these movable bodies can be displayed. The image transparency of the image 109SG005B and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle production may be varied. In this way, the image display device 5 can display an effect image with an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the action of the movable body and the battle performance during the ready-to-win performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, during the period from the end of the movable body action suggestive effect and the enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body action effect or the failure notification effect, the friendly character and the enemy character are visually recognized on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-4, after the movable body motion suggesting effect and the enlarged display period are over, the movable body motion effect or failure notification is given. During the period until the start timing of the effect, the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 are set to the first low visibility state, which is lower than before the end of the enlarged display period, thereby reducing the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character. You may let Furthermore, when executing the movable body action effect (when the variable display result is a big hit), by setting the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 from the first low visibility state to a second low visibility state, The visibility of the friend character and the enemy character may be further reduced. By doing so, after the end of the enlarged display period, the player can easily recognize that the enlarged display period has ended due to the decrease in the visibility of the friend character and the enemy character on the image display device 5. , during execution of the movable body presentation, it is possible to increase attention to the actions of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R.

10-28 to 10-35, the characterizing portion 109SG displays the same effect image on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body action suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body action effect. (Same ally character and enemy character) are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. A different effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the action effect. In particular, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestive effect is more than the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion effect. can be increased. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of variations of the effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect, so that the amusement of the game during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect can be improved. .

10-28 to 10-35, the characterizing portion 109SG displays the same effect image on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body action suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body action effect. (same ally character and enemy character) are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the image display device 5 displays a corresponding image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, while the movable body motion effect is being executed, the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect. As the body action effect corresponding image, an image different from the movable body action suggestive effect corresponding image may be displayed.

Furthermore, when the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect, the display period of the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the display period of the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect are set to can be different. By doing so, the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect and the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect effect are combined with the motions of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R (execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect). or execution of movable body action presentation).

Furthermore, when the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body action effect, the visibility of the image corresponding to the movable body action effect may be reduced by reducing the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 . By doing so, when the movable body action effect is executed, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the movable body action effect instead of the image corresponding to the movable body action effect.

Further, when the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, the image display device 5 outputs the sound corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect from the speaker 8L8R. When the image corresponding to the movable body action effect is displayed in , the sound corresponding to the movable body action effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body action effect may be output from the speaker 8L8R. By doing so, it is possible to output sounds corresponding to each image displayed on the image display device 5 from the speakers 8L and 8R when the movable body action suggestive presentation and the movable body action presentation are executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the movable body motion suggesting presentation or the movable body motion presentation is being performed.

Furthermore, when the movable body motion effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect (when the variable display result is a big hit), the image display device 5 can be operated on the image display device 5 from a timing before the start of the movable body motion effect. Display of the image corresponding to the body action effect may be started. By doing so, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the start of the movable body action presentation during the ready-to-win presentation of super ready-to-win, and to increase the player's attention to the movable body action presentation.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 109SG, in the reach effects of super reach α1 and super reach α2, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 toward the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although the form in which the display that moves at the speed V1 is executed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-7, the speed V1 is not a constant speed but within a predetermined range It may be variable. In this case, for example, when the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401, the speed of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is changed to the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggesting effect A. is changed to a lower speed (the speed V1 is changed to a lower speed) as it approaches . Note that the speed V2 of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S during execution of the movable body motion presentation A may be set to a speed higher than the maximum speed of the speed V1. By doing so, when the movable body motion suggesting effect A is executed, the movement speed (speed V1) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes, thereby improving the game interest. can.

In addition, the characterizing section 109SG outputs one action suggesting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to execution of the movable body motion suggestive presentation, and one loudspeaker notification from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to execution of the movable body motion presentation presentation. Although the mode of outputting sound has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of sounds may be output as the action-indicating sound and the jackpot notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. .

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to output a plurality of sounds as the operation suggestive sound and the big hit notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a plurality of output start timings of the operation suggestive sound and the big hit notification sound are provided, and the operation is performed at any timing. Different sounds may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R depending on whether the suggestive sound or the jackpot notification sound is started to be output. By doing so, the player can easily recognize that the movable body action suggestive effect or the movable body action effect is being executed by the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the sound can be output according to the output timing. Since the action-indicating sound and the big-hit notification sound are changed by pressing, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In particular, when the output timing of the action-indicative sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios depending on the result of the variable display. In this case, the player can be made to pay attention to the timing at which the output of the action-indicating sound is started, so that the interest in the game can be improved. Further, when the output timing of the jackpot notification sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be decided at different ratios according to the jackpot type and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 . In this case, since the player can be made to pay attention to the timing at which the output of the jackpot notification sound is started, the interest in the game can be improved.

10-21 to 10-24, the first movable body 109SG401 moves between the retracted position and the suggested position at a constant speed during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect. Although the form of reciprocating movement has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the first movable body 109SG401 may be temporarily stopped at the retracted position and the suggested position, or the first movable body 109SG401 may be decelerated or accelerated at positions near the retracted position and the suggested position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401 from being out of step.

In addition, in the characterizing part 109SG, after the movable body action suggestive effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 waits at the retracted position until the movable body action effect or the deviation notification effect is started. The present invention is not limited to this, and after the movable body motion suggesting effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to wait at the suggesting position until the movable body motion effect or the failure notification effect is started. good too. By doing so, when the movable body motion presentation is executed, the first movable body 109SG401 can be immediately moved to the presentation position, so that the game interest can be improved. Furthermore, since the first movable body 109SG401 is maintained at the suggestive position after the movable body motion suggesting effect is completed, the player's expectations for the execution of the movable body motion effect can be aroused.

10-21 to 10-24, in the characterizing part 109SG, the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is increased when the movable body action suggesting effect is executed and when the movable body action effect is executed. Although they are the same, the present invention is not limited to this. good too.

10-20, the characteristic unit 109SG controls the update of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) are executed based on the respective control timers, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable body In addition to the movement control, the lighting control of the LEDs provided in the pachinko game machine 1, the output control of the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like may be executed based on the control timers dedicated to each.

In this way, when executing the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, the movement control of the movable body, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound, for example, the effect control The CPU 120 executes a timer interrupt (performs S73 to S77 of the effect control main processing shown in FIG. 8 every 1 ms), and the effect image update control is performed every 33 ms, the movable body movement control is performed every 1 ms, and the LED lighting control is executed every 10 ms, and effect sound output control is executed every 1 ms. In particular, when the performance image update control, LED lighting control, and performance sound output control are executed, movement control of the movable body (first movable body motor 109SG421, second movable body motor 109SG422, third movable body motor 109SG422, drive control of the motor 109SG423) are executed together, movement control of the movable body, effect image update control, LED lighting control, and effect sound output control can be preferably executed.

In addition, in the characterizing part 109SG, the form in which the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light during the execution of the movable body motion suggestive effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LED 109SG495 may have a plurality of light emission modes. It is also possible to vary the ratio of control to the big win game state according to the mode in which the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect.

In addition, in the characterizing section 109SG, a form of displaying a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S on the image display device 5 was exemplified as the movable body motion suggesting effect A, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestive effect A are provided, and the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed in one of the modes as the movable body motion suggestive effect A. Depending on the number, the ratio controlled to the big hit game state may be varied.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-25, in the characteristic portion 109SG, during the third enlarged display period, the first movable body 109SG401 can be reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position (movable body motion suggestion presentation). Although a mode in which the execution is not performed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is performed even during the third enlarged display period. A case may be provided. In particular, when the variable display result is a big hit, the reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggestive position can be executed during the third enlarged display period, so that the third enlarged Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the first movable body 109SG401 reciprocates between the retracted position and the suggested position during the display period, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 109SG, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are moved toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestive effect A), or the first movable body 109SG401 is moved between the retracted position and the suggested position. (Movable body motion suggestive effect B) to suggest the execution of movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Execution of the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion effect B may be suggested in a mode other than the display of the image of the first movable body 109SG401 itself. For example, when the first movable body 109SG401 is provided with an LED (movable body LED 109SG495) as shown in the characteristic portion 109SG, the lighting and blinking period of the LED, the lighting color, etc., can be used to produce a movable body motion effect A or a movable body motion. Execution of production B may be suggested.

10-28 and 10-30, in the characterizing portion 109SG, the contrast between the images of the friend character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body action suggestion effect A. 10-28 (D) and 10-30 (D)), but the present invention is limited to this Instead, the movable body action suggestion effect A is performed at a timing before the image display device 5 reduces the contrast between the images of the friend character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B (for example, FIG. 10-28(C) or the timing of FIG.

In addition, when the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is started before the contrast between the images of the friend character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B is lowered in the image display device 5 as described above, By increasing the degree of transparency (transparency) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, the effect image being displayed on the image display device 5 (in the examples of FIGS. Alternatively, the image of the enemy character B) may be made more visible than when the contrast is lowered.

10-29(G) and the like, in the characterizing portion 109SG, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 when the movable body action presentation is executed, and is displayed on the image display device 5. Although a part of the effect image that is displayed is in an invisible state due to the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image is displayed when the movable body action effect is executed. The effect image 109SG005B of the explosion or an image dedicated to the movable body action effect may be displayed in the entire display area of the device 5, and all other effect images may be made invisible.

In addition, in the characterizing section 109SG, a form of executing the movable body motion effect during the ready-to-win effect of super reach has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of executing the movable body motion effect is A timing other than during the reach performance of the super reach may be used. For example, as a modification 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (A), 10-36 (B) and FIGS. It is also possible to make it possible to execute the movable body motion effect during the period from reaching reach to the start timing of the reach effect of super reach.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-36(B), the movable body motion suggesting effect is first started after reaching reach, and in the image display device 5, the ready-to-win effect to be executed after this is highly expected (big hit). The ratio of being controlled to the game state is high) reach production (for example, reach production of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the characteristic part 109SG) and low expectation (jackpot game state ) reach effect (for example, the reach effect with a lower expectation than the reach effects of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the characteristic portion 109SG) As a branch effect for informing whether to branch to or not, an image of a character with eyes closed is displayed as the branch effect, as shown in FIG. The character is gradually enlarged and displayed.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display that executes a low-expectation ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIGS. The display area of the image display device 5 gradually darkens without opening the eyes of the character. That is, in the branching effect, the characters displayed on the image display device 5 turn dark without opening their eyes, so that the ready-to-win effect with high expectations is not executed (the ready-to-win effect with low expectations is executed). be notified. Then, after the display area of the image display device 5 is completely darkened (after the branch effect is finished), the low-expectation ready-to-win effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display that executes a high-expectation ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIGS. It is reported that the highly anticipated ready-to-win effect will be executed by the character opening his/her eyes. In addition, at this time, a movable body motion presentation is also executed. After the movable body action effect and the branch effect are finished, the ready-to-reach effect with high expectation is executed.

In other words, the movable body action effect may be executed as an effect for notifying that the game state is controlled to a big win as illustrated in the characteristic portion 109SG, but it notifies that the ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation is to be executed. You may perform as production|presentation (production|production which alert|reports that the expectation degree controlled by a jackpot game state is high).

In this modification 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 10-36(B) and 10-37(C), the image display device 5 gradually enlarges and displays the character whose eyes are closed as a branch effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At the same time, by displaying an effect image such as concentration lines, the player may be made to pay attention to whether or not the character opens its eyes.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 109SG, during the ready-to-win production of the super reach, the form in which the present invention is applied as a branch of whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit was exemplified. As shown, the present invention may be applied as a branch as to which of the ready-to-win effect with a low expectation and the ready-to-win effect with a high expectation is executed. In this case, the specific image in the present invention is the image of the character (the first specific image is the image of the character with its eyes closed, and the second specific image is the image of the character with its eyes open), and the effect image in the present invention. corresponds to the image such as the above-described saturated lines.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, in the present modification 109SG-8, when the movable body action effect is executed as an effect for notifying that the high-expectation ready-to-reach effect will be executed, Although a mode in which the movable body action suggesting effect is executed before the movable body action effect is executed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body action suggesting effect may not be executed. Further, the execution ratio of the movable body motion presentation may be different between when the movable body motion suggesting presentation is executed and when it is not performed (the rate at which the ready-to-win presentation with high expectation is executed is different).

In addition, although a plurality of characteristic portions and modifications are disclosed in the present specification, the game machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more characteristic portions and modifications from these plurality of characteristic portions and modifications. You may

Further, in the characterizing portion 109SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result,
movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R);
A specific effect (for example, a movable body motion effect A or a movable body motion effect B) for announcing the effect result by moving the movable body, and repeatedly moving the movable body before the specific effect is executed. Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a movable body action suggestive effect A or a movable body action suggestive effect B) that suggests that the specific effect will be executed by 10-19 for executing the effect processing during variable display);
with
The production executing means is
The effect image for the movable body is not displayed when the suggestive effect is executed, while the effect image for the movable body is displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 to 10-35). Thus, while the movable body motion suggestive effect B is being executed, the image display device 5 does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B. is displayed),
A specific image is displayed while the suggestion effect is being executed, and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of super reach β1 If so, ally character B and enemy character A are displayed, and ally character B and enemy character A are displayed in an enlarged manner. (the part where the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed in an enlarged manner),
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, an effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the image display device 5 where the effect image 109SG005X is displayed),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and an advantageous state is obtained when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of super reach β2, in which friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect, A portion where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, whereas the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
moreover,
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
Guidance display is provided to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, using an image display. and a guidance display means for performing
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. performing a second guidance display, performing the first guidance display after completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state, and continuing the second guidance display;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated;
Continuing the second guide display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is finished;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect image can make the enlarged display of the specific image and the performance action of the movable body more conspicuous, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

In other words, the effect image makes the effect image of the movable body more conspicuous, thereby improving the amusement of the game. Emphasizes the instruction to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction with and thereafter emphasizes the instruction by instructing to shoot the game ball in the predetermined direction without inheriting the first guide display but taking over the second guide display. By not overdoing it, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling annoyance, and moreover, the second guide display is first performed to discreetly instruct the game ball to be shot in a predetermined direction from now on, and then the name of the advantageous state is recognized. , after recognition, it is possible to firmly instruct to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction by the first guidance display. In other words, it is possible to provide a game machine that easily attracts the interest of the player when installed in the game arcade and that gives an easy-to-understand instruction of the direction in which the game ball should be shot in an advantageous state.

In addition, when the specific effect or effect image and the guide display are displayed at the same time, it is preferable to give priority to the guide display. For example, by displaying the guidance display on the player's side and displaying the specific effect and the effect image on the back side, visibility can be ensured, thereby making it possible to perform appropriate guidance display.

In addition, when the movable body is operated while the guidance display is displayed, there is a possibility that the visibility of the guidance display is reduced due to overlap. In this case, it is preferable to display guidance on a plurality of display screens. By doing so, even if the visibility of one guide display is lowered, the visibility of the other guide display can be maintained and appropriate guide display can be performed.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving interest and preferably executing an instruction to prompt a player to shoot a game ball in a predetermined direction, a display result of a variable display is shown. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the specific display result,
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
Guidance display is provided to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, using an image display. and a guidance display means for performing
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. performing a second guidance display, performing the first guidance display after completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state, and continuing the second guidance display;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated;
A game machine that continues the second guide display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is finished is exemplified. The form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

<Description on Characteristic Portion 075F>
Next, the game machine according to the characteristic portion 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-60.

[Configuration of pachinko game machine 1 related to characteristic part 075F, etc.]
It is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characterizing part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 11-4). (usually called a large winning opening) is formed.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is installed in the space between the game board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. A large prize winning opening door is provided, and the large winning opening door slides horizontally between the inner side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open and close the path to the normal large winning opening for the game balls. be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in an off state, the large winning opening door is slid to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game balls enter the normal large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides toward the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the normal large winning opening. .

A game ball entering the normal big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through a region provided inside the normal big winning hole. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23, game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. Also, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round ends and the normal big winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V-variable winning ball device 075F007B includes a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see FIG. 11-4). V big prize opening) is formed.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided with a large winning entrance door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large winning entrance door is located between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By horizontally sliding and opening the space between , the path for the game ball to the V big winning opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in an off state, the large winning opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides toward the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V large winning opening. .

A game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024 (see FIG. 11-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V prize area) provided inside the V big prize opening. . By detecting the game ball by the V winning switch 075F024, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. In other words, in this embodiment, V winning is generated on the condition that the game ball enters the V big winning opening during the round of the jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. . Incidentally, the normal big prize opening and the V big prize opening are also collectively referred to as the big prize opening. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

A pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of lamps on a game board 2.例文帳に追加Specifically, in the pachinko game machine 1, in addition to the movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and the attacker lamp 9c provided in the vicinity of the normal big winning opening and the V big winning opening, an attacker upper lamp 075F009U, a left lower lamp 075F009D provided on the lower left of the game board 2, a board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a A board left lamp 075F009E is provided.

The movable body lamp 9d lights or flashes a lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is in a stopped state or an operating state, so that characters attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, in this example "XXX") is emitted. The attacker lamp 9c emits light in the vicinity of the attacker by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U emits light near the upper part of the attacker by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D emits light near the lower left corner of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The board right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a character-like housing, and when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks, the character-like housing on the right side of the image display device 5 emits light. . The panel left lamp 075F009E emits light near the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. Note that the board left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a character-like housing, like the board right lamp 075F009F. Also, the board right lamp 075F009F and the board left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.) like the movable body lamp 9d.

A pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of lamps in a game machine frame 3. - 特許庁Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a frame lamp made up of a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the game machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the game machine frame 3. Prepare.

Here, FIG. 11B is an explanatory diagram showing the frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of 11 lamps, 1st to 11th lamps, extending counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3 . The frame left lamp 075F009L lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), thereby causing the vicinity of the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light. On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has a group of 11 lamps, 1st to 11th lamps, clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3 . The frame right lamp 075F009R lights or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), thereby causing the vicinity of the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special figure LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the game board 2. - 特許庁The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and shown in FIG. It is a substrate that plays the role of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the variation of the special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED.

Here, FIG. 11-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special figure LED board 075F020 and the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As shown in FIG. 11-3(a), the special figure LED board 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 that indicates the variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable that indicates the variable display of the second special figure. Display unit 075F022, special figure 1 storage display unit 075F023 showing the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, special figure 2 memory display part showing the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special figure game 075F024, a normal pattern storage display unit 075F025 showing the number of normal pattern pending storage, a normal pattern display unit 075F026 showing variable display of normal patterns, a right hitting display unit 075F030 prompting the player to hit right, and a variable state , a time saving display portion 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display portion 075F027 indicating the number of rounds of a big hit. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, the result, the current game state, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking by lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 indicates whether or not the second special figure is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop figure of the second special figure determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 075F020 can urge the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/extinguishment of lighting means such as an LED in the right hitting display section 075F030. In this embodiment, when the player is urged to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F030 lights (lights up), and when the player is not urged to hit to the right, That is, when prompting the player to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hitting display section 075F030 is extinguished. After the design is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display lighting command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 075F030, and after the design is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-handed display extinguishing designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display part 075F030 is extinguished. Incidentally, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a big hit or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the big win game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may light the right-hand hitting display section 075F030 only during the big win round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 and turns off the right hitting display section 075F030.

Here, hitting to the right means that the game ball is shot toward the second flow path out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. is to operate the hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow-down path is, for example, a path passing through the left area of the game area, and ahead of it is a first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This path does not have the second start winning opening formed in 6B. The second flow path is, for example, a path that passes through the right side area of the game area, and beyond that is a second start winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V grand prize opening) exist. When the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows through the first flow-down path toward the first start winning opening. When the player shoots the game ball toward the second flow-down path, the game ball passes through the second flow-down path and enters the second start winning opening or the big winning opening (normal big winning opening, V big winning opening). flow into. In this embodiment, in the jackpot game after the jackpot occurs and the game state after the jackpot game (time saving state and probability variable state), the player hits to the right, so that the game area is provided on the right side The game ball is allowed to enter the second start winning opening and the big winning opening, and during this time, the right-handed display section 075F030 prompts the player to hit right. The player hits to the right while the display urging him to hit to the right is displayed, thereby causing the game balls to enter the second start prize-winning opening and a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls to be paid out. The right of the second special game can be obtained, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out by entering the game balls into the normal big winning opening. Furthermore, as will be described later in detail, the V big winning opening is opened during the round of the probability variable jackpot. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and be controlled to the variable probability state. Therefore, by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is being displayed, the player can benefit overall. In addition, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to shoot the game ball toward the first flow-down path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 11-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 corresponds to the special figure 1 memory display unit 075F051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game and the second special figure game. Special figure 2 storage display unit 075F052 showing the second reserved storage number, Special figure 1 variable display part 075F053 indicating the status or display result of the variable display of the first special figure, The situation of the variable display of the second special figure or It has a special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 showing the display result and a right hitting display portion 075F055 prompting the player to hit right. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence/absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of reservations, and the instruction to hit to the right by lighting/flashing/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 indicates whether or not the second special figure is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop figure of the second special figure determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means. Below, it is also called the variable display of the 1st special design to represent the variation of the stop design of the 1st special design by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 1 variable display section 075F021. In addition, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 is also referred to as the variation display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when prompting the player to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) to indicate that the player should hit to the right. is not urged to the player, that is, when the player is urged to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 is extinguished. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 120 for effect control lights the right-handed display part 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103, and the design is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed display unit 075F055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103 . Incidentally, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a big hit or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the big win game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may light up the right-hand hitting display section 075F055 only during the big win round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 extinguishes the right-handed display portion 075F055 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103 .

FIG. 11-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the right board lamp 075F009F, the left board lamp 075F009E, the right frame lamp 075F009R, and the left frame lamp 075F009L , is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (blinking) under the control of the effect control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. The movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the right board lamp 075F009F, the left board lamp 075F009E, the right frame lamp 075F009R, and the left frame lamp 075F009L, or all of them are played together. Also called effect lamp 9 .

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the effect control board 12, and is capable of lighting (blinking) each display portion under the control of the control CPU 120. FIG.

The special figure LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display unit can be lit (flashed) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
11-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and ready-to-win effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 displays a first reserved memory display area 075F005D in which the number of reserved memories can be displayed by the number of circular reserved displays, and the number of second reserved memories is displayed by the number of reserved circular displays. A second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second reserved storage display area 075F005U.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb including a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first reserved memory number, and a display of the second reserved memory number. are doing.

At the center of the first display area 075F005F, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged, and the variable display of the decorative patterns can be executed. It's becoming Also, a small pattern 075F005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small designs are the decorative designs displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs displayed in the "middle" decorative design display areas 5C, and the "right" decorative design display areas. Designs corresponding to each of the decorative designs displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 075F005M is also a pattern that is always displayed in the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, the decoration pattern is arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is located at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. In the part, it is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 075F005A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display is provided in the lower center of the first display area 075F005F.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-6 to 11-8.

(jackpot type)
FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in FIG. 11-6, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the big win, there is a big win probability after the big win game state ends, a base after the big win game state ends, and a fluctuation time after the big win game state ends. , and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot.

Specifically, as types of jackpots, 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot are provided. In addition, below, the mark of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth. In the 5R normal jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win V The game ball is not allowed to enter a specific area by repeating the opening and closing of the box, etc.), and after five rounds of the jackpot game state are completed, the jackpot is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state. In the normal jackpot, either the condition that such a low probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is established. continue until

The 5R probability variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win V ), which is controlled to a high-probability state and a high-base state after five rounds of the jackpot game state are completed. In the probability variable jackpot, either the condition that such a high probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is established. continue until

The 10R probability variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win V ), which is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after 10 rounds of the jackpot game state is completed. In the probability variable jackpot, either the condition that such a high probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is established. continue until

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot have common decorative symbols that stop when the jackpot occurs. In addition, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable variable jackpot have common fanfare effects (for example, backgrounds, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) that are performed when the jackpot occurs. The performance mode of the round performance (for example, background, characters appearing, sound effect, etc.) is common to each other, and the number of rounds of the big win game state is also common to each other. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize which of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot has occurred as long as he sees the stopped decorative symbols, the fanfare effect, and the round effect. Here, in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the V big winning opening is opened in a predetermined round (4R in this embodiment). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V big winning hole by striking to the right with the aim of the V big winning hole, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state.

In this way, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable probability jackpot make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the variable probability jackpot has occurred until the middle of the round, so these jackpots are also called chance bonuses.

As for the 10R high probability variable jackpot, the V big winning opening is opened in the predetermined round (the 9th round in this embodiment) as in the 5R high probability variable jackpot. At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V big winning hole by striking to the right with the aim of the V big winning hole, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. However, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs, the fanfare production mode (for example, the background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.) and the round production that is performed during the round of the jackpot game state is different from the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot. Therefore, when the 10R variable probability big win occurs, the player can recognize that the variable probability big win has occurred. Such a 10R probability variable jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in Figure 11-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for judging whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, updated from 0 to the upper limit of 65535, and then updated from 0 again. Random 1 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type to be one of the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. Random 2 is a random counter (for variation pattern type determination) that determines the type (type) of the variation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for variation pattern determination) that determines a variation pattern (variation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for normal design hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal design. Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of random 4 (for random 4 initial value determination).

In this embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, which of a plurality of types of jackpots such as a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, and a 10R probability variable jackpot as a jackpot gaming state is selected based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). It is determined. At this time, the jackpot pattern may also be determined based on the random 1 value.

Also, first, the variation pattern type is determined using the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type using the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 4) is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, a variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is obtained by grouping a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a big hit, the variation patterns are classified into a normal reach variation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach variation pattern type with super reach. Such variation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. Also, if it is a loss, it is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type that does not involve reach, a normal reach fluctuation pattern type, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type.

In such a variation pattern type, when the display result is lost, the selection rate of the variation pattern type is different between when it is in the time saving state and when it is not in the time saving state (in the time saving state, compared to when it is not in the time saving state Therefore, the percentage of selecting a variation pattern type with a short variation display time such as the normal variation pattern type is set high). Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be displayed is a predetermined number or more and when it is less than a predetermined number. When the reserved memory number of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable display is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, execution of reserved number reduction control for shortening the variable display time compared to when the reserved memory number of each special symbol is less than the predetermined number. You may make it For example, in the hold number reduction control state, compared to when it is not in the hold number reduction control state, it is set so that the rate of selecting a fluctuation pattern type with a short fluctuation display time such as a normal fluctuation pattern type is higher , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened compared to when the number of holds reduction control state is not in effect. Further, in the hold number reduction control, even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be shortened compared to when the hold number reduction control state is not performed.

Also, the variation pattern may be a one-stage determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery instead of the two-stage determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

(Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 11-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a big-hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101 .

FIG. 11-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the RO 101, and is a table in which jackpot determination values to be compared with the random R are set. The big hit determination table includes a normal (non-variable probability) big win determination table used in a normal state (game state not variable probability state, that is, non-variable probability state) and a variable probability big win determination table used in the variable probability state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, each numerical value listed in the left column of FIG. Each numerical value described in the column is set as a jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value set in the probability variable jackpot judgment table is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (called the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). By adding the unique jackpot determination value, a larger number of jackpot determination values (referred to as the probability variable jackpot determination value or the second jackpot determination value) than the probability variable jackpot determination table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, it is determined that the game is a big hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). ), it is decided to make a big hit (a normal big win or a variable probability big win) with respect to the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 11-8(A) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit.

FIGS. 11-8 (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table. FIG. 11-8(B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 11-8(C) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11-8 (B), the numerical value to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and , and "10R probability variable jackpot" are set with corresponding jackpot determination values. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11-8(C), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "10R probability variable jackpot", which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, is set.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 (B) and (C), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a decision value (jackpot pattern determination value) for determining the jackpot pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to the "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "1". The determination value corresponding to the "5R probability variable big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "10R probability variable big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "7". The special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022 on the special figure LED board 075F020 are such that the lighting means such as LED lights or blinks in a lighting mode corresponding to each big hit pattern, so that the stopped jackpot pattern can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by the lighting means such as LED lighting or blinking in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. A jackpot pattern can be shown.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot type, and the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot pattern. Determine the jackpot pattern. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, as for the jackpot of the second special symbol, compared with the jackpot types that can be selected with the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting "10R probability variable jackpot" is high, and the player The ratio of selecting the jackpot type that is advantageous for the player is high.

(Production control command)
FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various production control commands to the production control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command is composed of, for example, two bytes, the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 11-9 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In the following description, "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special figure. When the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H) is received, the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decoration pattern.

The command 81XX(H) is a variation pattern command designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols to be variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variation display of the special symbols (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8C01(H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that it is determined to be a failure. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R normal jackpot is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R probability variable jackpot is determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that the 10R probability variable jackpot is determined. Each of the losing designation command, the 5R normal jackpot designation command, the 5R probability variable jackpot designation command, and the 10R probability variable jackpot designation command, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8C system commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start the variation display of the first special figure. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start the variation display of the second special figure. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates display of the initial screen at power-on) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery specification command that specifies recovery from power failure (specifies display of a power failure recovery screen) that is transmitted when power supply to the game machine is resumed. A command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating a normal state background. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probability changing state designation command that designates the background of the probability changing state. Each of the normal state designation command, the time saving state designation command, and the variable probability state designation command, or these are collectively referred to as the 95 series command or the background designation command. A command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of the 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot start 1 designation command, the jackpot start 2 designation command, and the jackpot start 3 designation command, or these commands are also collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command for specifying during the opening of the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designation command during the opening of the big winning opening is also referred to as an A1 system command. A2XX(H) is a post-opening designation command for the large winning opening that indicates closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after the opening of the big winning opening is also called an A2 system command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of the 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designation command, the jackpot end 2 designation command, and the jackpot end 3 designation command, or collectively these commands are also called A3 series commands.

Command AD00 (H) is a variable probability determination device passing designation command that designates that a V prize has occurred. The probability variation determination device passage specification command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100 (H) is a first start prize designation command that designates that there has been a first start prize. Command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command that designates that there has been a second start prize.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved storage number designating command that designates that the first reserved storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved storage number designation command is also called a C1-type command. The command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that designates that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserve storage number designation command is also called a C2-type command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are the contents of the judgment result at the time of winning such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, variation pattern type judgment at the time of start winning to the first start winning mouth or second start winning mouth It is a production control command shown. Among them, the command C4XX(H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big hit will occur and the judgment result of the type of the big win among the results of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number value among the winning determination results is.

C7XX(H) is a large winning opening designation command indicating passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display extinguishing command indicating extinguishing of the right-handed display. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In this embodiment, especially the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD system command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not there will be a big hit at the time of start-up winning, and determines the range of determination values of the type of the big win and the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. Then, a value designating a big hit and a value designating the type of the big win are set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, and control is performed to transmit them to the effect control CPU 120 . In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type to the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can recognize the type of the big win, and can recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F will be described. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 11-10 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 11-10, in the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 is provided with a first pending storage buffer (storage buffer for storing pending storage information of the first special symbol) or a second pending storage buffer (second special It is determined whether or not there is reserved storage data in a storage buffer for storing reserved storage information of symbols (step 075FS001). If there is no reserved storage data in either the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (N at step 075FS001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stopped (step 075FS002). When the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal process is ended. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y at step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, after transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt, based on the fact that the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is set, the customer It is controlled so as not to send the wait demo designation command. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is reset when the variable display of the next special symbol is started.

When there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether or not it is data (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "second" (that is, the data indicating the "first") (N in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets the special symbol pointer (the Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for a second special symbol (step 075FS005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006 ).

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special The variable display of the pattern is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

According to the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if there is even one data of the second reserved storage in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage is displayed in the second 1 It is executed with priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the reserved storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the saving area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read out and stored in the reserve storage buffer of RAM 102 . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in a pending storage buffer in RAM 102 .

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 Store the random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or Second reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103, based on the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction, performs control to transmit the reserved storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 ( step 075FS009). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads random R (random number for judging a big hit) from the reserve storage buffer, and executes a judging module for a big hit (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging a big hit, which is extracted in the starting winning judging process and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and judges the big win. The big-hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big-hit determination value (see FIG. 11-8) with a big-hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a big-hit if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit.

In the process of judging a big hit, when the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than when the game state is a non-variable probability state (normal game state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, the probability variable jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (table in which the numbers on the right side of FIG. 11-8 (A) are set) and the number of jackpot determination values There is provided a normal jackpot determination table (a table in which numerical values on the left side of FIG. 11-8(A) are set) which is set smaller than the time jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the variable probability state, and when the gaming state is the variable probability state, performs the processing for judging the big hit using the variable probability big hit determination table, and the game state is normal. When it is in the state or the time-saving state, the judgment of the big hit is processed using the normal big-hit judgment table. That is, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big-hit determination values shown in FIG. 11-8(A). If it is determined to be a big hit (Y at step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS012. Determining whether or not to make a big win means determining whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but it also means determining whether or not the stop symbols in the special symbols are to be the big winning symbols. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is the variable probability state is performed by whether or not the variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the game state is shifted to the variable probability state, and is reset when ending the variable probability state. Specifically, the probability variable flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times) or the condition that the next big hit is determined. It is reset at the timing of ending the variable display of the special symbols and stop-displaying the stop symbols when the earlier condition is established.

If the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big-hit determination values (N at step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

In step 075FS011, if the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) coincides with any of the big-hit determination values, the CPU 103 sets a big-hit flag indicating a big hit (step 075FS012). It should be noted that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used for determining one of the plurality of types of jackpot types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11-8 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. One of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables is selected (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 11-8(B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 11-8(C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging the type of jackpot extracted in the starting winning judgment process and pre-stored in the first holding memory buffer or the second holding memory buffer, and uses the jackpot type judgment table selected in step 075FS013 to hold the random number. A jackpot type and a jackpot pattern corresponding to a value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for judging the jackpot type stored in the storage buffer is determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in FIGS. 11-8 (B) and (C), for the first special symbols and the second special symbols, the relationship between the jackpot types and the jackpot patterns is set so that the jackpot patterns are different for each jackpot type. Since the big win type and the big win pattern are determined at the same time, the corresponding relation between the big win pattern and the game control according to the big win type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variable jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variable jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a special symbol stop symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot pattern determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stop pattern of the special patterns according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be ``5R probability variable jackpot'', ``3'' is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variable jackpot", "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 11-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 11-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a big hit variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the big hit type, and when the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects a losing variation pattern Select the type determination table. Then, the CPU 103 reads random 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) from the first reservation storage buffer or the second reservation storage buffer, and refers to the selected table to select the variation pattern type from among a plurality of types. to decide.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a variable time timer formed in the RAM 102 to a value corresponding to the variable time corresponding to the selected variable pattern (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special symbol variation processing)
11-12 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 11-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y at step 075FS202), changes the value of the special symbol process flag. It is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (S113) (step 075FS203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N at step 075FS202), the process is terminated.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIGS. 11-13 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 11-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to terminate the variable display of the special symbol, and stops at the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 or the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022. Control for deriving and displaying the pattern is performed (step 075FS301). In addition, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is ended, and "second" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display section 075F022 is ended. In addition, a pattern confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 . Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). When the jackpot flag is not set (N at step 075FS303), the process proceeds to step 075FS309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the variable probability flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

In addition, by referring to the opening pattern data stored in the RO 101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), Data indicating the release mode such as interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, an opening mode for opening the normal big winning openings in all of the 1st to 5th rounds is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102 . In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 4th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加Further, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 9th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加Data on the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Also, a value corresponding to the fanfare time, which is the time for displaying the big win (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the image display device 5), is set in the big winning hole control timer (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the big win opening pre-processing, the big winning hole control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the big winning hole is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the processing is terminated.

When it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set in step 075FS303 (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step 075FS309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N at step 075FS309), the process proceeds to step 075FS316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving frequency counter indicating the remaining fluctuation frequency of the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time saving frequency counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, when the variable display resulting in the losing display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time saving state, the game state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. At step 075FS311, when the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N at step 075FS311), the process proceeds to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is set (step 075FS313). If the variable probability flag is set (Y at step 075FS313), the variable probability flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS315) in response to the game state shifting from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315), and proceeds to step 075FS316. move on. If the variable probability flag is not set at step 075FS313 (N at step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without performing the processing of step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process is terminated.

(Jackpot opening pretreatment)
FIGS. 11-14 are flowcharts showing an example of the jackpot opening pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 11-14, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N at step 075FS402), the process is terminated.

When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y at step 075FS402), a special winning opening open designating command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, according to the opening pattern, the solenoid 82 is driven to open the normal big winning opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the normal big winning opening is opened in the first round.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step 075FS306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning hole control timer to the maximum time (large winning hole opening time) during which the big winning hole can be opened. The corresponding big winning opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during big hit opening (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process is terminated.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIGS. 11-15 are flowcharts showing an example of the process during jackpot opening. As shown in FIG. 11-15, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer has reached 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y at step 075FS501), the process proceeds to step 075FS511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N at step 075FS502), it is determined whether or not the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (step 075FS503). Whether or not the normal big winning slot or the V big winning slot is open may be determined by the value of the opening number counter.

If it is determined at step 075FS503 that the normal big winning opening or the V big winning opening is not open (N at step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal big prize opening or the V big prize opening is open (Y at step 075FS503), it is determined whether or not the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N at step 075FS504), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is ON (Y at step 075FS504), the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (updated by addition) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variable probability determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the variable probability state is controlled when a V winning occurs. If the variable probability determination flag is set (Y at step 075FS506), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the variable probability determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS506), it is determined whether or not the V prize switch 075F024 is on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N at step 075FS507), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y at step 075FS507), set the probability variation determination flag (step 075FS508), transmit the probability variation determination device passage designation command (step 075FS509), and move to the processing of step 075FS510 do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach the predetermined number (N at step 075FS510), the process is terminated.

When the value of the winning number counter reaches a predetermined number (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal big winning opening, or to drive the solenoid 075F083 to close the V big winning opening. is closed (step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 clears (sets to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the processing.

(Jackpot opening post-processing)
FIGS. 11-16 are flow charts showing an example of the process after the opening of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 11-16, in the process after opening the jackpot, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening number counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the open number counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (that the jackpot game has ended) is set to the big win opening control timer. For example, the time to be notified in the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process exit.

At step 075FS601, if the value of the counter for the number of openings is not 0 (N at step 075FS601), a designated command after opening the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the round starts in the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the round (also referred to as the V open round) in which the V big winning opening is opened, that is, the next round is the V open round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N at step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 and open the normal big winning opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 and open the V big winning opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIGS. 11-17 are flowcharts showing an example of the jackpot ending process. As shown in FIG. 11-17, in the jackpot ending process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot winning opening control timer to which the jackpot ending time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process is terminated. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the big hit flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a variable probability determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the variable probability determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS704), the process proceeds to step 075FS705. At step 075FS704, if the variable probability determination flag is set (Y at step 075FS704), the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability variation state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), the probability variation determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process proceeds to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step 075FS710), and 150 is set to the time saving frequency counter (step 075FS711). Then, the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, in step 075FS704, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step 075FS705), and 100 is set to the time saving number counter (step 075FS706), and the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize whether it is in any game state, variable probability, short time, or normal, by a variable probability state designation command or the like transmitted from the CPU 103 .

(Production processing during jackpot)
Next, processing by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 will be described. FIGS. 11-18 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect processing during the big hit. As shown in FIG. 11-18, during the big hit effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the big hit end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, a flag such as a jackpot end designation command reception flag is set by the effect control CPU 120 when data indicating that the jackpot end designation command is received is stored in a command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121, and the jackpot is won. It is erased at a predetermined timing such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N at step 075FS651), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y at step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 075FS656). In addition, according to the content of the process data set next, the control of the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed (step 075FS657). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads image data from the ROM 121 according to the content of the process data and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display an image corresponding to the effect during the round on the image display device 5 . . In addition, it outputs a control signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/blinking/extinguishing of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 . Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the production device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is continued according to the contents of the set process data. (step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the process data described above based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main substrate 11 . For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a big win, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanfare effect by controlling the effect device. Set data. Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a big hit, the right-handed display part 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 is displayed to prompt the player to hit to the right. A lighting means such as an LED is turned on.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a special winning opening open specifying command (A1 system command) from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of the big win, the production during the round is executed by controlling the production device as follows. To do so, set the process data corresponding to the production during the round.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a special winning opening open specifying command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 2R of the 5R normal jackpot, it executes the V probability variable suggesting effect suggesting whether or not the probability variable jackpot. set the process data of At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A102 (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V probability variation suggesting performance) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designation command (A102 command) during the opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 2R of the 5R variable probability jackpot, process data for executing the V probability variable suggestive effect (see FIG. 11-41) set. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot open designation command (A102 (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V probability variation suggesting performance) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designation command (A103 command) during the opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 3R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, the V notice for notifying that the next 4R is the V open round. Set the process data for executing the effect (see FIG. 11-42). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A103 A big win round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V notice performance) corresponding to the specified big win round is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, the game ball enters the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data for executing the effect (see FIG. 11-43) to aim at the V that makes you aim. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot after opening the jackpot (A203 A command) is used to specify the finished big win round (in this case, 3R), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the end of the specified big win round is set. Aim for the V effect is a guidance display using an image display regarding the V big prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the "Aim for V" effect, an image is displayed to urge the player to hit to the right so as to shoot the game ball aiming at the V big winning opening, which is a specific area. In the "Aim for V" effect, an image pointing to the specific area of the V big prize opening itself may be displayed, or an image pointing to the vicinity of the V big prize opening of the specific area may be displayed. , an image may be displayed that indicates the route to the V grand prize opening, which is the specific area.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when receiving a special winning opening open specifying command (A104 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, continues to aim at V and executes the effect (see FIG. 11-44). Set the process data for At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A104 command) to specify a big win round (in this case, 4R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the specified big win round.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a special winning mouth open designation command (A108 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8R of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the V notice effect for notifying that the next 9R is the V opening round is performed. Set process data for execution. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A108 (8R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (V notice performance in this case) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designated command (A208 command) after opening the large winning opening from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the game ball enters the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data for executing the effect to aim at the V that makes you aim. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the designation command after opening the jackpot (A208 A command) is used to specify the finished big win round (in this case, 8R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the end of the specified big win round.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the performance aiming at the V continuously when receiving a special winning opening open specifying command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 9R of the 10R probability variable jackpot. . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and specifies the jackpot open designation command (A109 command) to specify a big win round (in this case, 9R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the specified big win round.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a probability variation determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the big hit round, the V winning effect is executed by controlling the effect device as follows. Set the process data corresponding to the production.

Effect control CPU 120, when receiving a probability variation determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from CPU 103 during 4R of 5R probability variation big hit, sets process data for executing V winning effect (see FIG. 11-44) .

The production control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V winning production when receiving the variable probability determination device passage designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during the 9R of the 10R variable probability big hit.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot game state, the ending effect (FIGS. 11-46, 11) indicating the end of the jackpot game state -47)) to set the process data.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103, thereby controlling the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, thereby performing various effects. perform the production of

[Overview of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 075F configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 075F has the contents of the game performed in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 already explained, the following description will be given in particular to the part of the game related to the characteristic part 075F. do.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first shoots a game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left side area of the game area by hitting to the left. When the launched game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special game include the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed to urge the player to hit right. As a right-handed promotion effect, a character (for example, "Right-handed") and a figure (for example, an arrow pointing rightward, which is the direction of the second flow path) are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage right-handed hitting. In addition to displaying the image, in the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050, lighting means such as LEDs are lit to prompt right hitting. As a result, the player will hit to the right from then on.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable variable jackpot, and 10 times in the case of the 10R variable jackpot). One time opening of the big winning opening is determined by timing of elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

In the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the normal big winning opening is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win V, there is no possibility of winning V. Also, since V is not won, the effect of aiming for V is not executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round is displayed. Specifically, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpots are opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V probability variation suggesting performance is executed to suggest whether or not the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting effect, it is notified that the probability variation big hit is not the normal big hit. After that, the V big prize opening is opened in the 4th round, but no V prize is generated, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 5th round after that, and the ending performance is executed when the 5th round is completed.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the big winning opening is usually opened in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of the 5R variable probability jackpot, as in the 5R normal jackpot, the normal big winning opening opens in the 1R and 2R, and in the 2R, the V probability variable that suggests whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot. Suggestion production is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting performance, it is notified that the probability variation big hit is achieved. Then, in the 3rd round after that, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 4th round is the V release round is executed. In the 4th R, when the V big winning opening is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning occurs. As a result, the player is granted the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 5th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the big winning opening is usually opened in the 1st to 8th R and the 10th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th R. Specifically, in the case of the 10R variable probability big hit, the normal big prize winning opening is opened in the 1st to 7th R, and the V probability variable suggesting effect is executed to suggest whether or not the probability variable big hit is in the 7th R. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting performance, it is notified that the probability variation big hit is achieved. Then, in the 8th round after that, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is the V open round is executed. In the ninth R, when the V big winning opening is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning occurs. As a result, the player is granted the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending performance after the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, and 150 times in the case of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 10R probability variable jackpot). be done. Furthermore, in the case of the 5R variable probability jackpot and the 10R variable probability jackpot, and when a V prize occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is changed to the variable probability state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) controlled to the time saving state. controlled by That is, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the game state after the jackpot round is the low-probability base state, and in the case of the 5R-probability-variable big hit or the 10R-probability-variable big win, the game state after the jackpot round is the high-probability-high base state.

Even in the variable probability state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055. Therefore, after the first big win (also called first win) occurs, the player is always urged to hit to the right by the right-handed promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the end of the big-hit round.

In the time-saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the special figure) than the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the general figure) is executed to shorten the normal state, and furthermore, control is executed to improve the probability of becoming a "normal game hit" in the normal state than in the normal state. In addition, in the time-saving state, by increasing the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting winning opening is increased and the second starting is performed. Electronic chew support control may be performed to facilitate entry into the winning slot (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time-saving state after the big hit round, the second special game is started by entering the launched game ball into the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win (also referred to as consecutive wins) occurs.

As the type of the big hit in the second special game, as described above, there is a 10R probability variable big hit. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. It should be noted that the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During the round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). The single opening of the big winning opening is determined by the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

Since it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, the big prize opening is usually opened in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds, but the V big prize opening is opened only in the 9th round. Concretely, as in the case of the first hit, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the 8th round after that, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is the V release round is executed. In the ninth R, when the V big winning opening is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning occurs. As a result, the player is granted the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to a time saving state and a probability variable state (high probability high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times) as in the case of the first hit. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot rounds in consecutive wins, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player can hit the consecutive chances in the variable probability state or the time saving state after the end of the big winning round, Even in the state, it is always urged to hit to the right by the right hitting promotion effect.

After the first big hit round ends, the probability variable state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring Then, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low-probability-low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055 also ends. As a result, the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left area of the game area by hitting left again.

[Timing chart of an example of processing]
11-19 to 11-21, the timing of the main processing executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F will be described. FIGS. 11-19 are timing charts showing an example of the process during the winning variation. FIGS. 11-20 are timing charts showing an example of processing during a big win. FIG. 11-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the big win. 11-19 to 11-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-19, at t1, when the first special game is started by the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the CPU 103 sends the effect control CPU 120 a reserved storage number designation command (C1 system command), background designation command (95 system command), pattern variation designation command (8D system command), display result designation command (8C system command), and variation pattern designation command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the first special symbol (for example, ready-to-win effect, notice effect, etc.) ) and set the process data for executing

For example, the effect control CPU120, by specifying the number of first reserved storage based on the number of reserved storage designation command, or to update the display of the first reserved storage display area 075F005D, the lighting mode of the special figure 1 storage display unit 075F051 to update. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the game state under control based on the background designation command, and controls the image display device 5 so as to display a background image or the like corresponding to the game state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the start of the variation of the special symbol based on the symbol variation specifying command, and sets the start timing of the effect. Also, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the presence or absence of the big win and the type of the big win based on the display result designation command, and determines the decoration pattern accordingly. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern designation command, the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern (such as presence or absence of reach), and the content of the effect during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach type of production, etc.).

After that, when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, when a big hit occurs, at t3 thereafter, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 system command) and a right hand display lighting command (FD system command) to the effect control CPU 120. Send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the fanfare effect, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image congratulating a big win as fanfare effects, or outputs a sound congratulating a big win from the speakers 8L and 8R. Set the process data for In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image prompting right hitting, or outputs a sound prompting right hitting from the speakers 8L and 8R as a right hitting promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, after that, when the big winning round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning opening and also sends a special winning opening open specification command (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the production during the round in the 1Rth round.

After that, when the 1R-th game ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A201 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 2R-th game starts at t6, the CPU 103 normally opens the big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening open specification command (A102 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 2Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V probability variation suggestive effect (see FIG. 11-41) based on the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening (A102 command).

After that, when the 2R-th game ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A202 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 3rd round starts at t8, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and also transmits a special winning opening open designation command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 3Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V advance notice effect (see FIG. 11-42) based on the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A103 command).

After that, when the 3R-th game ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing inter-round effects between rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the Aim for V effect (see FIG. 11-43) based on the designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 11-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening, and also sends a special winning opening open specification command (A104 command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the production during the round in the 4Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V advance notice effect (see FIG. 11-42) based on the special prize opening open designation command (A104 command), and then executes the aim for V effect (see FIG. 11-43). Set process data for execution.

After that, when the V winning occurs at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability variation determining device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V prize effect (see FIG. 11-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A204 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 5Rth game starts at t13, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a special winning opening open specification command (A105 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 5Rth round.

After that, when the 5R-th game ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A205 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending effect.

After that, it is controlled to a variable probability state and a short working time state (high probability high base state), but in this state, the CPU 103 changes the effect control command depending on whether the number of pending memories exceeds 0 or not.

For example, at t16, when the number of reserved memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a symbol variation designation to the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the second special symbol (for example, ready-to-win effect, notice effect, etc.) ), and set the process data for executing

On the other hand, when the reserved storage number does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIG. 11-60) that can specify that no game is being played. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image of an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or a small pattern, or stops outputting sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 11-60. Any production may be used as long as the person can be identified.

[Lamp lighting mode]
11-22 are explanatory diagrams showing lighting modes of the lamps. In this embodiment, game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L) , The right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are turned off. Represented by

In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are each lit up, as shown in FIG. 11-22 (B). represented in the form of

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are lit/blinking/lit in a manner corresponding to the effect and the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state in which the light is turned off is represented by hatching as shown in FIG. 11-22(C).

[Production Mode of Pachinko Machine 1]
Next, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. Figures 11-23 to 11-33 and Figures 11-38 to 11-50 are explanatory diagrams showing presentation modes of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game.

As shown in FIG. 11-23(a), when the losing symbols stop due to the variation of the special symbols in the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. After that, if there is a first reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C1 system command), background designation command (95 system command), pattern variation designation command (8D system command) to the effect control CPU 120 ), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the first special symbol (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.). 11-23(b1) to 11-24(b3), the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect in FIG. 11-23(b1) to FIG. It is set based on the pattern variation designation command (8D system command), the display result designation command (8C system command), and the variation pattern designation command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-23(b1) to 11-24(b3) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 11-23 (b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (b2), in the case of a big hit variation, an image corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win effect.

After that, when the variation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (b3), when a big hit occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 and turns on the right hand display. Send a command (FD system command). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. 11-24 (c1) to FIG. 11-38 (d2), the effect control CPU 120 uses a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command). Set based on In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-24(c1) to 11-38(d2) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

Here, the fanfare effect will be described in detail. The fanfare production is divided into a plurality of production parts. In this embodiment, the fanfare effect includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed promotion part. The congratulatory part is a performance part in which a performance for congratulating the winning of a big win is executed. As will be described later with reference to FIG. It is displayed, a sound congratulating the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to congratulate the big win. The name display part is an effect part for notifying the player of the start of the big win round by announcing the name of the big win game state that has occurred, as well as informing the player of the type of the big win game state that has occurred. -24 (c2), as will be described later in (c3), a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed on the image display device 5, or a sound corresponding to the start of the big win is output from the speakers 8L, 8R. , the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to correspond to the start of the big win. The right-handed promotion part is a performance part that encourages the player to hit right-handedly, and uses image display of characters and graphics as described later in FIGS. A large right-handed promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit right. The effect control CPU 120 receives a symbol determination designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the big hit symbols are stopped and the symbols are determined, and then receives a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , the fanfare performance is started, and the fanfare is performed until the normal big winning opening is opened and the big winning round is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-24(c1), an image (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!") is displayed as a congratulatory part in the fanfare production. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so that it is displayed on the device 5, the sound congratulating the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode congratulates the big win. or In addition, as a right-handed promotion effect, an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and characters (in this example, the characters "right-handed") is displayed in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5 to promote small right-handed hitting. A performance is performed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers and can display a predetermined image on each layer. As shown in FIG. 11-24(c1), the image made up of graphics and characters in the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is an image congratulating a big hit (in this example, a character image and "Congratulations!"). is displayed in the layer on the front side (in the direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 side) than the character image of . In addition, in the fanfare effect, a sound that encourages right-handed hitting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and further, as a right-handed promotional effect, the right-handed display portion 075F030 and right-handed display portion 075F055 are lit in a manner that encourages right-handed hitting. (Lighting in this example). Note that the order of starting the above-described image display, lighting, etc. is as follows. First, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0-system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD-system command) after design determination, and lights up the right-handed display portion 075F030. The production control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD system command), while the received big hit start designation command (A0-series command), small right handed promotion performance The image display device 5 is caused to display an image consisting of graphics and characters in , and an image congratulating the winning of the jackpot. At this time, the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right hitting promotion performance located further to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the big win. That is, first, the lamps are turned on in the order of the right-handed display portion 075F030 and the right-handed display portion 075F055, and then the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the image congratulating the big hit are displayed in this order. An image is displayed. In addition, the display of images consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 are determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. is done until At that time, first, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display extinguishing designation command together with a background designating command after design determination, and turns off the right-handed display portion 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display extinguishing designation command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion performance based on the received background designation command. When the process ends, the background image in the normal state is displayed on the image display device 5 . It should be noted that the image consisting of graphics and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting by the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 may start and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of graphics and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect coincides with the lighting period of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055. becomes easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (c2), as a name display part in the fanfare effect, a part of the name image indicating the name of the generated jackpot game state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS !!" "CHANCE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, sounds corresponding to the start of the big win are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on so as to have a lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big win. The lighting mode changes.

As shown in FIG. 11-25 (c3), as a name display part in the fanfare effect, following FIG. “BONUS!!” in the character image of “CHANCE BONUS!!” is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5 . As a result, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off once before the large right-handed promotion performance to be executed in the right-handed promotion part of the fanfare performance starting from the next timing. After that, from FIG. 11-24 (c4) to FIG. 11-33 (c29), as a right-handed promotion effect, a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and a character (in this example, the character “right-handed”) ) in the center of the image display device 5 in a large size.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare effect and the big right hitting promotion effect based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table shown in FIGS. 11-34 to 11-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121 . For example, based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table, the effect control CPU 120 emits guidance light to urge the player to hit to the right by moving the light emitting position of the frame lamp. In this embodiment, the light-emitting location literally means a location that emits light. A location where a lamp that is not lit (that is, a lamp that is extinguished) is not called a light-emitting location. In another example, the light-emitting location refers to a location that emits light with high brightness. A location may be referred to as a location, but a location where a lamp that is lit with a luminance lower than that of a lamp positioned at the light emission location may not be referred to as a light emission location. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the effect control CPU 120 will be specifically described.

FIG. 11-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 11-34, the parent table in the lighting data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable body lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, board left lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the fanfare effect and the hard right hitting promotion effect are defined respectively. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 executes a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then a hard right hitting promotion effect for 2000 msec. It should be noted that since the large right hitting promotion effect is configured to be repeated a plurality of times (twice in this embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 repeats the 2000 msec long right hitting promotion effect twice. Become.

FIG. 11-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 11-35, in the child table of the lighting data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is subdivided into the fanfare effect and the right-handed promotion effect, and is referred to in each time zone. grandchild table is specified.

Here, regarding the big right hitting promotion effect, the grandchild table W11 common to both the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L is designated. In addition, since the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are turned off without being used in the big right hitting promotion effect, a grandchild table is not provided. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. For the attacker lamp 9c, a plurality of grandchild tables are specified by subdividing the 2000 msec, which is the execution time of the large-right hitting promotion effect, into a plurality of periods. For example, grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

11-36 and 11-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of grandchild tables in the lighting data table. FIG. 11-36 shows the data in grandchild table W11 for Frame Right Lamp 075F009R and Frame Left Lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIG. 11-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data are defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec. , data for turning off (0x000000) is defined. In the grandchild table, the data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 11B are defined for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. In FIG. 11-36, for each lamp included in the frame lamp, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are shown in order to clearly show the lighting period. A dashed circle mark is attached to it.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table W11, the fourth lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L lights up first at T1, then the third lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L lights up at T2, and then the left frame lamp 075F009L lights up at T3. The second lamp lights up, then at T4 the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T5 the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T6 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. The lamp lights up, then at T7 the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. Then, at T10, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, and then at T11, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. After starting to light, each lamp continues to light while changing its color to seven colors. After that, first at T46, the fourth lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T47 the third lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T48 the second lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is extinguished, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is extinguished, and then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is extinguished, and then At T52, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T53, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, at T54, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T55. The seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T56, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. After that, each lamp is extinguished until 2000 msec in the one-time large right-handed promotion effect elapses. After all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, only about 320 msec remains. T57). The first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the frame right lamp 075F009R are extinguished at all times.

Using the grandchild table W11 storing the data as described above, as shown in FIGS. , frame right lamp 075F009R up to the eighth lamp, the frame lamp lights up in seven colors so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the frame lamp is performed twice.

FIG. 11-37 shows the data in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d and the grandchild table A11a-A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 11-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data are defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec. Data indicating that the lamp is turned off (0x000000) is defined. In the grandchild table K11, for the movable body lamp 9d, of the characters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, left X (left X), middle X (middle X), right X (right X) Data are provided for each of the In FIG. 11-37, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000 ) are marked with dashed circles.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first, at T3, the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is lit, then at T4, the X lamp in the movable body lamp 9d is lit, and then at T5, the movable body lamp is lit. The right X lamp of 9d lights up. After starting to light, each lamp continues to light while changing its color to seven colors. After that, first, at T48, the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off, then at T49, the X lamp in the movable body lamp 9d is turned off, and then at T50, the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off. lights out. After that, each lamp is extinguished until 2000 msec in the one-time large right-handed promotion effect elapses. In addition, after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting etc. is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, the remaining time is only about 320 msec. (T57). Further, when compared with the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain turned off) and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

Using the grandchild table K11 storing the data as described above, as shown in FIGS. While the movable body lamp 9d is lit, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned on, and then the middle X and right X lamps are turned on. After that, each lamp continues to light in seven colors, and at the same timing when the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. lights out. As a result, the movable body lamp 9d is illuminated in seven colors, starting from the left X lighting, to the middle X lamp, and then to the right X lamp, drawing an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the movable body lamp 9d is performed twice.

FIG. 11-37 also shows the data in the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 11-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined over a very long time of 600000 msec with respect to 330 msec to be turned on. Data of (0x000000) is defined.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data are defined at intervals of 20 msec for 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of color change over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b defines only one pattern of color change for 280 nsec. ing. That is, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the attacker lamp 9c over 280 ns each time the grandchild table A11b is referred to once in 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until 1350 msec is completed, and performs a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of repeating color changes.

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data are defined over a very long time of 600000 msec for the lighting target of 320 msec. there is

When the large right-hand hitting promotion effect is started, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then controls the grandchild table A11b at intervals of 280 nsec for 1350 msec. is referenced multiple times to cause the attacker lamp 9c to repeat a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of color change, and then the grandchild table A11c is referenced over the last 320 msec to turn off the attacker lamp 9c. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24), the frame lamps are illuminated in an arch from left to right, and soon the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned on. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c lights up, then the frame lamps go out in an arch from the left to the right. becomes extinguished. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

In the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, where the light is turned off at the beginning, the colors of the predetermined pattern are repeated in the middle, and the light is turned off after that, the attacker lamp 9c is turned on three times. Scenarios are divided into stages, and the same grandchild table A11b is repeatedly referred to for the repetition of the predetermined pattern color in the middle, so that there is no need to prepare data for the entire time from the beginning to the end of lighting for 2000 msec. , it is sufficient to prepare data only for the repeated part. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 11-25(c4), description will be given of the presentation mode in the large right-handed promotion effect executed in the right-handed promotion part of the fanfare presentation. As shown in FIG. 11-25(c4), the image display device 5 displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-25(c5), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-26(c6), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the movable body lamp 9d, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-26(c7), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, X in the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 11-26(c8), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Further, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 11-27(c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-27 (c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 11-27 (c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the board right lamp 075F009F, the board right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 11-28(c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 11-29(c15), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "RIGHT" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts lighting. After that, the attacker lamp 9c repeatedly turns on and off (that is, blinks). Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 11-29(c16), the image display device 5 continues to display the character image of "RIGHT" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-29(c17), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Further, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 11-30(c18), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, X in the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (c19), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (c20), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 11-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 11-31 (c23), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot!" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the board right lamp 075F009F is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot!" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot!" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the flashing attacker lamp 9c is also extinguished. Sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R also stops. As a result, the first series of large right-handed promotion performances is completed.

As shown in FIG. 11-32 (c26), the second big right-handed promotion effect is started. At this time, as for the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. It should be noted that, in the second hitting to the right promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds in a mode corresponding to the hitting to the right promotion effect. As a result, when the transition to the jackpot round is started after the big right-hand hitting promotion effect ends, the BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the jackpot round) during the jackpot round and the sound in the big right-hand hitting promotion effect do not overlap. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 11-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second hard hitting promotion effect, the game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/extinguishes in the same manner as in the first hard hitting promotion effect. During this time, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and graphics than the small right-handed promotion effect, and is an effect that encourages the player to hit right in a more emphatic manner than the small right-handed promotion effect. be. Therefore, the player can be urged to hit the right hand in an easy-to-understand manner by executing the large right-hand hitting promotion effect during the fanfare effect.

In addition, in the first right-handed promotion performance, a sound (for example, queuing effect sound) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance, thereby effectively affecting the player. While it is possible to encourage hitting to the right, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-hand hitting promoting effect in the second big hitting to the right promotion effect, so that the BGM during the subsequent big win round. can be prevented from interfering with

In addition, in the large right-handed promotion performance, the arrow image and the character image are displayed so as to gradually appear in stages, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks to effectively encourage right-handed hitting. The effect is more flashy than the effect of displaying the name image of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 11-24 (c2). For example, the character images appear one by one in the big right hitting promotion effect, but all the character images appear at once in the name image of the big win game state. In addition, as for the size of the character image in the big right hitting promotion effect, the character image in the name image in the big win game state is larger than all the character images. Furthermore, the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect is longer than the execution time of the effect of displaying the name image. Thus, after the name image of the big winning game state is displayed to inform the player of the big winning, the player can be informed of the right hitting by the big right hitting promoting performance with emphasis.

The attacker lamp 9c is a place where the player actually carries the game ball and is aimed at when the game ball is shot. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to the target. The attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color such as seven colors without flashing.

In the following example, the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs will be described. The number of rounds is different for the 10R variable probability big hit, but other effects are the same as the 5R variable probability big hit. Also, the 5 normal jackpot is different in that the V notice effect and the V winning prize effect are not executed, but the other effects are the same as the 5R probability variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished and the second round of the big right-handed promotion effect ends, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (c27), switching to the big hit round is performed. Start. Specifically, the visibility is gradually lowered by fading out the arrow image and the text image of "Right shot!". The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. In addition, the display of the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-out. Incidentally, as described above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command), a series of effect data up to the stage of FIG. 11-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect in the 1Rth. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-39(d3) to 11-40(e4) on the basis of the special winning opening open specification command (A101 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-39 (d3) to 11-40 (e4) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-39 (d3), the background image during the big win round appears by fading in from the state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 is completely white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. In addition, the display of the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade-in" and "fade-out" will be specifically described. Fade-in and fade-out are a kind of effect in image display called "transition". A "transition" is a transition that is inserted between the first cut (image) and the second cut (image) when the scene of the video changes from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It's about the effect. In addition to fade-in and fade-out, transitions include various techniques in video editing such as wipe and overlap.

"Fade-in" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, in fade-in, the transparency (also referred to as transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from a first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to a second degree (for example, 0%) that is lower than the first degree. % or 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, use 1 second between 0 and 1 second to gradually decrease the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 50%, The next 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds is used to gradually decrease the transparency (transmittance) from 50% to 0% (second degree). On the other hand, as in the method of changing the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to change the object (image) to opaque, it takes a predetermined time to change the transparency (transparency). rate) is not fade-in. Note that when changing the opacity (also referred to as opacity) instead of the transparency (transmittance), the above % values are reversed. That is, in fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the second degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) over a predetermined period of time.

“Fade-out” is an effect in which an image representing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, in fade-out, the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). %) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 second, The transparency (transmittance) is then gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree) using 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds. On the other hand, as in the method of changing the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to change the object (image) to transparent, the transparency (transparency) takes a predetermined time. rate) is not faded out. In addition, when changing the opacity (opacity) instead of the transparency (transmittance), fade-out changes the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0% or 1%) over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (c26) and (d1), the transparency (transparency When the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 0%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is gradually increased to 100%. The image is made transparent in stages to make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-38(d2), the player sees only the white image in the second layer of the screen located on the back side of the first layer of the screen. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is set to 0%. By gradually lowering to , the background image during the big win round is gradually made opaque to make it easy to see (fade-in). As a result, the player is shown the background image during the big win round on the first layer located in front of the second layer on the screen.

There is also a technique called "crossfade" as a transition. Cross-fading is, for example, fading out the first layer of the screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located behind the first layer. In terms of appearance, it is a method of showing the second layer of the screen after showing the first layer of the screen. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, as described above, the first layer of the screen is faded out and then faded in, so that the white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located on the back side is displayed. is displayed once in the middle of switching from the image in the first period of the ED to the image in the second period of the ED.

In this embodiment, even if the switching display of the background image such as the transition as described above is executed, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed in the upper right of the screen is not affected by the switching display of the background image. Display is maintained without being affected. Here, "affected by the background image switching display" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right-hand hitting promotion effect due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out, or the player cannot see the image. The visibility of the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or lowered, such as the player can see the image of the small right-handed promotion effect a little but cannot understand the meaning (right-handed promotion) indicated by the image. It means that the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-described phenomenon does not occur and the visibility of the player's visibility of the image of the small right-throwing promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, the image of the small right-throwing promotion effect is not the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in FIG. 11-39 (d4), after the background image during the big win round appears by fading in, as shown in FIG. , a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . At the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big winning round is displayed. Furthermore, an image (an arrow and characters) for promoting a small right stroke is displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. In addition, BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the big win round) starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the effect during the round. It should be noted that, as described above, at the time when this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the large right-hand hitting promotion effect has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 11-40 (e2), during 1R, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, the image of the effect promoting small right hitting is displayed in the upper right ( arrows and letters) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-40 (e3), when the 1Rth is completed, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A201 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 11-40 (e4), between the rounds, the big prize opening is usually kept closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An image (an arrow and a character) of a small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A102 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 2Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-41(e5) to 11-42(e8) on the basis of the special winning opening open specification command (A102 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-41 (e5) to 11-42 (e8) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5), when the 2nd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the upper right continues. , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 11-41 (e6), during 2R, the V probability variation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, an image prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and a text image of "PUSH!!" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to be superimposed on the background image corresponding to the during-round effect. In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode according to the production during the round (such as a V probability variation suggestive production). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the production during the round (such as the V probability variation suggestive production).

As shown in FIG. 11-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability variation suggestive effect, the V A character image of "Success!" In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode according to the production during the round (such as a V probability variation suggestive production). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the production during the round (such as the V probability variation suggestive production).

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (e8), when the 2nd round is completed, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A202 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (e9), between the rounds, the big prize opening is normally kept closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Succeeded!!” is displayed, and further, an image (arrow and characters) for promoting a small right stroke is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 3Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . 11-42 (e10) to FIG. 11-43 (e12), the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10) to FIG. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-42 (e10) to 11-43 (e12) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the normal big winning opening is opened and the V announcement effect is executed. Specifically, a character image and a character image of "Grab the V in the next round!" In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as V notice performance).

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (e11), during the 3R, the V notice effect is continuously executed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5, together with the character image. A character image of "Catch the V in the next round!" is displayed, and further, an image (arrow and characters) of a small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as V notice performance).

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (e12), when the 3rd round ends, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. On the other hand, based on the command from CPU103, the production control CPU 120 executes the production aiming at V between the rounds from the 3rd round to the 4th round.

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13), between rounds, the effect of aiming for V is executed while the big winning hole is closed, that is, the game ball cannot enter the big winning hole. Specifically, the V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large), which is the target (place) to be aimed by the player by hitting to the right, is superimposed on the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An arrow image pointing to the winning slot) and a character image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the "Aim for V" effect, it is possible to prompt the player to hit rightward so as to enter the game ball into the V big winning hole by using the image display related to the V big winning hole. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A104 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4Rth based on the command from the CPU 104 . The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A104 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-44 (e14) to 11-44 (e15) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V big prize opening is opened, and the "Aim for V" effect is executed. As a result, the player can aim at the V big winning hole by hitting right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

As shown in FIG. 11-44 (e15), during the 4R, the "Aim for V" effect is executed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

When a game ball enters the V big winning opening and a V winning occurs, the CPU 103 transmits a probability variation determining device passing designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V winning effect. It should be noted that the effect control CPU120, the data of each effect of Figure 11-44 (e16) ~ Figure 11-45 (e18), set based on the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-44 (e16) to 11-45 (e18) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-44 (e16), when the V winning effect is executed, the background image corresponding to the mid-round effect is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to indicate that the V winning has occurred. V" image is displayed, and an image (an arrow and characters) of a small right hitting promotion effect is subsequently displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as the V winning performance). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (such as the V winning effect).

As shown in FIG. 11-45 (e17), when the 4th round is finished, the V big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A204 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 11-45 (e18), between rounds, the V big prize gate and the normal big prize gate remain closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and furthermore, the image (arrow and character) of the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A105 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 5Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . 11-45 (e19) to FIG. 11-46 (e21), the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect in accordance with the special winning opening open designating command (A105 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-45 (e19) to 11-46 (e21) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 11-46 (e20), during the 5R, the round middle effect is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect continues to the upper right. (arrow and letter) is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 11-46 (e21), when the 5th round is finished, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command after opening the big winning opening (A205 command) to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing after that, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103 . The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-46 (f1) to 11-47 (f4) based on the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-46 (f1) to 11-47 (f4) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 11-46 (f1), when the ending effect starts, an image is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 for selecting the stage in the variable probability state after the big win game state. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-47 (f2), during the ending effect, a name image indicating the name of the probability changing state along with the character image (in this example, the character image of “Yume Yume RUSH!!”) is displayed on the image display device 5. displayed in the center. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-47 (f3), during the ending effect, the addiction suppression notification effect is executed. Specifically, an image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Beware of getting addicted. Pachinko is a game to be enjoyed moderately." Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. It should be noted that, during the winning streak, a game result image showing the game result (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) in the jackpot game state is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the ending effect, but at the time of the first win. Also in , such a game result image may be displayed during the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-47 (f4), a forget-to-take prevention image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from forgetting to take a card such as a prepaid card or membership card related to the game. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the end of the ending effect, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), and a symbol variation designation to the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative design in response to the variation in the second special design, or effects during variation in accordance with the variation in the second special design (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.). 11-48 (g1) and (g2), the performance control CPU 120 stores the data of each performance in FIGS. (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-48 (g1) and (g2) progresses with the passage of time rather than being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-48 (g1), even during the variation of the second special symbol, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 11-48 (g2), the variation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lost symbol is displayed. Also at this time, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols.

After the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command) to the effect control CPU 120. , a pattern variation designation command (8D system command), a display result designation command (8C system command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative design in response to the variation in the second special design, or effects during variation in accordance with the variation in the second special design (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.). 11-48 (g3) to FIG. 11-49 (g5), the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect in FIG. 11-48 (g3) to FIG. It is set based on the pattern variation designation command (8D system command), the display result designation command (8C system command), and the variation pattern designation command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-48 (g3) to 11-49 (g5) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 11-48 (g3), even during the variation of the second special symbol, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 11-49 (g4), in the case of a big hit variation, an image corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, A game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win performance. On the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-49 (g5), the group announcement effect is executed as the announcement effect during the big hit variation. The group notice effect is that objects such as characters appear on the screen of the image display device 5 step by step or all at once to make the visibility of the ready-to-win pattern difficult, and then the object disappears to show the specific pattern. It is a production that makes matching (for example, 777 etc.) appear. Even if a notice effect that makes the visibility of the pattern difficult is executed in such a reach mode, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect ( arrows and letters) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of the effect image" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the effect to promote the small right shot or the player cannot see the image of the effect to promote the small right shot due to the display of the effect image such as the group notice. The player's visibility of the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or reduced, such as the player's ability to see the image of the production, but the player cannot understand the meaning of the image (promotion of right-handed play). It means that the player's visibility is given some influence. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-described phenomenon does not occur and the visibility of the player's visibility of the image of the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, the image of the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is different from the effect image. It can be said that it is not affected by the display.

When the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 11-49 (g6), as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, when a big hit (10R probability variable big hit) occurs, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. Note that the right-handed display lighting command (FD system command) is not transmitted because the right-handed promotion effect has already been executed. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103 . The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-50 (h1) and (h2) progresses with the passage of time rather than being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-50(h1), as a fanfare effect, an image (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Yah! Also, a sound congratulating a big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed to a lighting mode for congratulating a big win. On the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-50(h2), after the fanfare effect is started, the image display device 5 displays a name image (character image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!" , a sound corresponding to the start of the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to correspond to the start of the big win. In addition, in the case of consecutive wins with the special figure 2 hit, since the big right hitting promotion effect has already been executed at the time of the special figure 1 win, the big right hitting promotion effect is not executed again. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24), the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. , the frame lamp does not light up in a mode corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect.

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect in the 1Rth.

As shown in FIG. 11-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens, the background image corresponding to the round effect is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the upper right continues. , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

Thereafter, although illustration is omitted, as shown in FIGS. 11-40 to 11-46, various effects such as V notice effect, aim for V effect, and V prize are executed during the round, and when the jackpot round ends soon. , ending effects are executed as shown in FIGS. 11-46 and 11-47. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-48, it is again controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state. In this series of games, on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed, and a right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the fourth symbol Each of the right-handed indicators 075F055 of the unit 075F050 continues to light up. Before long, when the variable probability state after the jackpot game state ends without the occurrence of a jackpot and the state is controlled to the normal state, a right-handed display extinguishing designation command is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120, and the command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120. The CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the right hitting display part 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Each of the parts 075F055 is turned off. As a result, the player hits to the left again in the normal state.

[Aspect of performance of pachinko game machine 1 when power is restored]
FIG. 11-51 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored during the fanfare effect by winning one special figure. 11-51, as shown in FIG. 11-20, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during fanfare production and then the power supply is restored. .

As shown in FIG. 11-51, a state in which an image (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations!") congratulating the big hit is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 11). -24 (c1) state), a state in which a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (in this example, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (Fig. 11-24 (c2) state), a state in which only the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-28 (c14)), and an arrow image in the large right-handed promotion performance together with the arrow image “Right-handed! !” is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-31 (c23)), the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. After that, when the power is turned on, a character image of "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a large winning opening open designation command (A101 command) from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A101 command) is received, the large winning opening open designation. Based on the command (A101 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 1R as shown in FIG. 11-39(e1). In addition, an image congratulating a big hit (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!"), a name image indicating the name of the big win gaming state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS!!"). character image), the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect, and the character image of "Right-handed!"

In this way, even if power failure occurs before the large right-hand promotion effect is executed or until the large right-hand promotion effect is completed, the small right-hand promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on after that. Therefore, it is possible to at least encourage the player to hit the ball to the right immediately after the power failure, and it is not possible to enter the game ball into the main prize hole if the player forgets to hit the ball to the right. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player the disadvantage of

FIG. 11-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from power failure during one round of the jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. 11-52, as shown in FIG. 11-20, assume power interruption 2 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 1R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 11-52, in the state where the image corresponding to the effect in 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-40 (e2)), when power failure occurs, After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 2R as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption. If prize balls are obtained during subsequent rounds, points may be added starting from 0 points again, such as adding 10 points for every 10 balls obtained. It should be noted that the point image is not limited to being displayed at 0pt after recovery from power failure, and the point may not be recognized by a predetermined image such as "??"

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done.

FIG. 11-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the electricity is restored during the round after one round of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 11-53 is the power interruption 3 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 11-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 11-53, when an image corresponding to an effect between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of (e4) in FIG. 11-40), when power failure occurs, After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 2R as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure.

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 11-54 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from power failure during two rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. As shown in FIG. 11-54, as shown in FIG. 11-20, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 2R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 11-54, in the state where the image corresponding to the V probability variation suggestive effect in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 11-41 (e7)), when power failure occurs, the image After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V advance notice effect shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120, effect control is performed. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), to execute the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10). can also be configured to

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done.

FIG. 11-55 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure between the rounds after two rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 11-55 is the power interruption 5 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted during the round after 2R, and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 11-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 11-55, in the state where the image corresponding to the round after 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-42 (e9)), when power failure occurs, the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V advance notice effect shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120, effect control is performed. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), to execute the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10). can also be configured to

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 11-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine in the case of recovery from power failure between rounds after three rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. As shown in FIG. 11-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 11-21 is the power interruption 6 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted during the round after the 3R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 11-56, in the state where the image corresponding to the round after the 3R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-43 (e13)), when power failure occurs, the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A104 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A104 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image during 4R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption. Also, since the stored data about the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 11-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120, performance control. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), executes the effect of aiming at V as shown in FIG. 11-44 (e14). It can also be configured as

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as being unable to enter the game ball into the V big winning opening in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can.

FIG. 11-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the four rounds of the jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. As shown in FIG. 11-57, as shown in FIG. 11-21, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 4R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 11-57, the state where the image corresponding to the effect of aiming for the V in 4R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-44 (e15)), or the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-44 (e16)), if the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the power is turned on to display "Restoring...". is displayed on the image display device 5 .

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A105 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 5R as shown in FIG. 11-45 (e19). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure.

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done. Furthermore, as in 4R, when a power failure occurs while the V is aimed and the small right-handed promotion effect is being executed, and as shown in FIG. In the case where the power is cut off while the right-handed promotion effect is being executed, both are common to each other, and after the power is restored from the power cut-off, aim for V and the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, while the small right-handed promotion effect is not executed. is minimally performed. Therefore, in any situation, it is possible to at least prompt the player to hit to the right immediately after recovery from the power failure in a manner common to all situations.

FIG. 11-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the mode of presentation of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from power failure between the rounds after four rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 11-58 is the power interruption 8 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during the round after 4R, and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 11-21. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 11-58, when power failure occurs in the state where the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 11-45 (e18)) between rounds after 4R. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption.

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 11-59 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored during the final round of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. 11-59, as shown in FIG. 11-21, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 5R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 11-59, the state in which the image corresponding to the effect during the round in 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state in FIG. 11-46 (e20)), or the state after the end of 5R (FIG. 11 -46 (e21)), the image is not displayed on the image display device 5, and then the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command), it responds to the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). Based on this, the image display device 5 is caused to display a effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIG. 11-46 (f1).

In this way, even if power is cut off during the final round of the big win, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that. It is possible to encourage hitting to the right and to prevent forgetting to hit to the right as much as possible.

FIG. 11-60 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored during the ending effect at the time of winning one special figure. 11-60, as shown in FIG. 11-21, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during the ending effect and then the power supply is restored. .

As shown in FIG. 11-60, the state in which the image for selecting the stage in the probability changing state after the jackpot game state among the ending effects is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 11-46 (f1)), the character A state in which a name image indicating the name of the variable probability state is displayed together with the image on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 11-47 (f2)), showing an image corresponding to the immersion suppression notification effect and the result of the game in the jackpot game state. A game result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-47 (f3)), and a forget-to-take prevention image for preventing the player from forgetting to take a card is displayed on the image display device 5. If a power failure occurs in any of the displayed states (the state of FIG. 11-47 (f4)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Restoring..." is displayed by turning on the power. is displayed on the image display device 5 .

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, if there is a reserved memory number, the effect control CPU 120 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C1 system command, C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), a symbol variation designation command (8D system command) from the CPU 103 , display result designation command (8C series command) and variation pattern designation command (81 series command) are received, and when these commands are received, reserved storage number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), Based on the background designation command (95 series command), pattern variation designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and variation pattern designation command (81 series command), Figure 11-48 (g1) The image display device 5 is caused to display a performance image corresponding to such a variation of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory number, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103, and when these commands are received, the background Based on the specified command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demonstration specified command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored while the initial pattern (in this example, "123" as the decorative pattern and the small pattern) is stopped. .

In this way, even if the power is cut off during the ending, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as much as possible, such as not being able to enter the second start winning port in a probability variable state after a big win game state due to forgetting to hit to the right. be able to.

[Main Effects Obtained by Characteristic Portion 075F]
The technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the characterizing portion 075F described above are individually listed below.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)), and the second guidance display. A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to FIG. 11-38 (c26) and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect),
After that, while the first guidance display is ended, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. On the other hand, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect),
After that, while the game medium cannot enter the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, aim at V as shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13). The part where the image display corresponding to the production is performed and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestion production is continued),
After that, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued even after the state in which the game medium cannot enter the specific area becomes the state in which the game medium can enter the specific area (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-44 (e15), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are continued),
After that, when the game medium enters the specific area, the second guidance display is continued while the third guidance display is ended (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (e16), aim for V While the image display corresponding to
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and an image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect When power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure while the display is being performed, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, shown in FIG. 11-44 (e15)) During the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-hand hitting effect, the power failure occurs and the power is recovered from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, after power-on as shown in FIGS. 11-51 and 11-57, "Restoring..." The part where the character image of and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

(1-2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)); A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to FIG. 11-38 (c26) and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect),
After that, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 11-38 (d1), (d2 ), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect is terminated, while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion performance is continued),
After that, in conjunction with the closing of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 11-43 As shown in (e13), the part where the image display corresponding to the effect of aiming for V is performed and the image display corresponding to the effect suggesting hitting the small right is continued),
Thereafter, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, FIG. 11-44 ( As shown in e15), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim for the V effect and the image display corresponding to the suggestive effect of hitting the small right are continued),
After that, in conjunction with the entry of the game medium into the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, V as shown in FIG. 11-44 (e16)). While ending the image display corresponding to the aiming effect, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and an image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect When power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure while the display is being performed, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, shown in FIG. 11-44 (e15)) During the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-hand hitting effect, the power failure occurs and the power is recovered from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, after power-on as shown in FIGS. 11-51 and 11-57, "Restoring..." The part where the character image of and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

(1-3) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)); A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to FIG. 11-38 (c26) and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect),
After that, by receiving a 1R opening command (for example, a command for specifying during the opening of a large winning opening (A101 command), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 11-38 As shown in (d1) and (d2), the portion where the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect continues),
After that, by receiving a command after the 3R is completed (for example, a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning hole), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 11-43 As shown in (e13), the part where the image display corresponding to the effect of aiming for V is performed and the image display corresponding to the effect suggesting hitting the small right is continued),
After that, by receiving a 4R opening command (for example, a command for specifying during the opening of a large winning opening (A104 command), the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, in FIG. 11-44 (e15) As shown, the part where the image display corresponding to the Aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are continued),
After that, by receiving a V passage command (for example, a probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 11-44 As shown in (e16), the part where the image display corresponding to the "Aim for V" effect is finished, while the image display corresponding to the "Short right hit suggesting effect" is continued),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (c23), the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect during the display), and during the time the second guide display and the third guide display are performed (for example, shown in FIG. 11-44 (e15)). (While the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are being performed), the power failure occurs and the power is recovered from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Restoring..." is displayed after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 11-51 and 11-57). The part where the character image and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

Specifically, during execution of the fanfare effect, the player is encouraged to hit right in subsequent games by executing a large right-handed promotion effect and a small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize right-handed promotion. It is possible to prevent the player from appealing to the player for excessive hitting to the right by surely recognizing it, and then ending the large right-handed promotion performance while continuing the small right-handed promotion performance as it is. In addition, the effect of aiming for the V to aim at the V big prize mouth is executed from the time when the V big prize mouth is still closed, and by continuing as it is after the V big prize mouth is opened, the V To appeal to a player the importance of aiming at the big winning hole and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. In addition, after the V prize is generated and the V big prize opening is closed, the effect of aiming for the V is terminated, thereby preventing unnecessary promotion notification from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-described flow, since the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed, the player is instructed to always hit right-handed even after the V prize is generated from before the V big prize opening is opened. can be encouraged. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right. Also, when a power failure occurs during the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect and the power is restored from the power failure, it corresponds to the aim V effect. When the power failure occurs while the image display and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are being performed and the power is restored, after the power is turned on, the character image of "Restoring ..." and the small Since the image of the right-handed promotion effect is displayed, the player can be urged to continue right-handed in the subsequent game even if power failure occurs.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process for executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120),
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24 ( c1) image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the first guidance display and the Performing the second guidance display (for example, image display corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect and image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-38 (c26)),
During the period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (e1) to 11-46 (e21) The part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued while the image display corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect is not performed during the round),
In the special state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after the big hit as shown in FIGS. 11-48 and 11-49 The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect in the variable state),
The second guidance display is not affected by background image switching display (for example, switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 11-38 (d1) to As shown in FIG. 11-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fading in and fading out),
The second guide display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display by the group forewarning effect) (for example, the image display by the group forewarning effect as shown in FIG. 11-49 (g5)). The part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by).

Specifically, during execution of the fanfare effect, the player is encouraged to hit right in subsequent games by executing a large right-handed promotion effect and a small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize right-handed promotion. To prevent a player from appealing to a player for excessive hitting to the right by surely recognizing it and continuing the small right-handed promotion performance while ending the large right-handed promotion performance during the subsequent big winning round. can be done. In addition, the player can be urged to always hit right by continuing to execute the small right hitting promotion effect even in the variable probability state or the time saving state after the end of the big win game state. Furthermore, after the occurrence of the big hit, the switching display (fade-out, fade-in, etc.) performed when switching to the big-hit round after the fanfare production is executed does not affect the small right-hand hitting promotion effect, and the big-hit game state is not affected. Since the small right-hand hitting promotion performance is not affected by the image display by the group notice performance performed in the variable probability state or the time-saving state after finishing, the player can always be urged to hit right. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed hitting effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the name display of the advantageous state is completed (Figs. 11-25 to 11- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. In conjunction with this, the frame lamps are lit in an arch from the left side to the right side twice),
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp lights up in the first right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect),
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among the plurality of guidance light emission (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (c26) to 11-33 (c29), the second time A portion that does not output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion production when the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion production),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, after the start of the big hit round as shown in FIG. The part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
In a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. When it becomes, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right hitting promotion effect part that does not output sound in a certain way).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the lighting position of the lamp by the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hitting. can be encouraged to Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right. Second time), when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, so the sound during the big win round that is output after the execution of the large right-handed promotion performance is performed. A player can smoothly hear the BGM during the big winning round without being affected by the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting against the BGM. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked thereto is not output, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized mode. can be prevented from feeling troublesome. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1))
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the name display of the advantageous state is completed (Figs. 11-25 to 11- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. In conjunction with this, the frame lamps are lit in an arch from the left side to the right side twice),
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp lights up in the first right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect),
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among the plurality of guidance light emission (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (c26) to 11-33 (c29), the second time A portion that does not output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion production when the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion production),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, after the start of the big hit round as shown in FIG. The part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
The guidance means, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display When the specific display result is obtained, the guide light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the frame lamp is a large right-handed promotion effect The part that does not light up in a manner according to the condition).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the lighting position of the lamp by the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hitting. can be encouraged to Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right. Second time), when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, so the sound during the big win round that is output after the execution of the large right-handed promotion performance is performed. A player can smoothly hear the BGM during the big winning round without being affected by the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting against the BGM. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed as in , and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1))
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the name display of the advantageous state is completed (Figs. 11-25 to 11- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guidance means performs the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance display after turning off the light emission means (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the frame lamp is lit in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the display of the image corresponding to the promotion effect),
The sound output means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the guidance light emission (for example, FIG. 11-25 (c4) to FIG. As shown in 11-32 (c24), when the frame lamp lights up in the first right-handed promotion performance, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance),
Thereafter, in a state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2 hit, the speakers 8L and 8R will produce a large right-hand hitting promotion effect part that does not output sound in a corresponding manner).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. Also, during the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting position of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so it is easier to understand and effective. The player can be urged to hit right. Furthermore, when the frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right, so that the player is urged to hit to the right by the sound as well. can be done. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked thereto is not output, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized mode. can be prevented from feeling troublesome. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1))
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the name display of the advantageous state is completed (Figs. 11-25 to 11- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guiding means are
After turning off the light emitting means, the guidance light is emitted in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. The part that lights up the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display),
Thereafter, in a state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the guide light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the frame lamp corresponds to the large right-handed promotion effect part that does not light up in the mode).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. Also, during the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting position of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so it is easier to understand and effective. The player can be urged to hit right. Furthermore, when the frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right, so that the player is urged to hit to the right by the sound as well. can be done. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed as in , and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(5) The second guide display is displayed in a manner that is emphasized more than the name display of the advantageous state that is part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-hand hitting promotion effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 to 11-33 has a larger character image than the display of the name image in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. In addition, characters appear step by step, the execution time is long, and they are displayed in an emphasized manner. As a result, it is possible to emphasize to the player that he should hit to the right.

(6) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means is
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission,
Not outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the midway guide light emission among the guide light emission of a plurality of times,
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among the guidance light emission for a plurality of times.

Specifically, among a plurality of right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps, sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotional effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, but the second right-handed promotion is output. As for the subsequent right-handed promotion, the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. In addition, the sound is not output in conjunction with the promotion of the second and subsequent right strokes. In other words, the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect includes only sound data linked to the first right-handed promotion. As a result, the BGM during the big winning round is smoothly delivered to the player without being affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right hitting against the BGM during the big winning round output after the execution of the large right hitting promoting performance. can be heard.

(7) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means is
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission,
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the midway guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission,
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among the guidance light emission for a plurality of times.

Specifically, among a plurality of right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps, sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotion effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, and then the right-handed promotion effects are output. Sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the promotion of hitting to the right, but the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R for the final right-handed promotion. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are interlocked with the first and second right-handed promotions based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. The sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of the third right stroke, and the sound is not output. In other words, the sound data for right-handed promotion effect includes only sound data associated with each of the first and second right-handed promotions. It should be noted that the sound data includes only sound data linked to promoting right-handed hitting for one time, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute two loops of the sound data linked to promoting right-handed hitting for one time. . Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data interlocked with promoting right-handed hitting twice, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute the sound data interlocked with promoting right-handed hitting twice. . As a result, the BGM during the big winning round is smoothly delivered to the player without being affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right hitting against the BGM during the big winning round output after the execution of the large right hitting promoting performance. can be heard.

(8) The light emitting means is composed of a plurality of lamps, and after turning off all of the plurality of lamps, emits the guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-25 (c3)). As shown in , after all the lamps of the frame lamp are turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner according to the large right hitting promotion effect).

Specifically, after all lamps of the frame lamps are once turned off, the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion performance, so that the player is urged to hit right in an easy-to-understand and effective manner. can be done.

(9) the light emitting means emits guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display based on data defined by a lighting data table;
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIG. 11-34) that defines the execution time of the guidance light emission, and a child table (for example, , child tables shown in FIGS. 11-35) and the corresponding grandchild tables (for example, child tables shown in FIGS. 11-36 and 11-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamps 9 including the frame lamps refer to the parent table to specify the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect, and refer to the child table to select the grandchild table in which the lighting data is defined. Lighting/blinking/extinguishing is performed by specifying and referring to the grandchild table. As a result, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently lit in an appropriate lighting mode.

(10) Of the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not emit guidance light is not defined as the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are turned off without being used in the big right hitting promotion effect, so a grandchild table is provided. do not have. As a result, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guiding means performs the guiding light emission by sequentially moving the light emitting locations of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, FIGS. 11-25 to 11- 33, the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the game area).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 to 11-33, each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the game area, thereby executing a large right-handed promotion effect. By doing so, it is possible to urge the player to hit to the right in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guiding means emits the guiding light while changing the light emission color of the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights the frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp executes a large right-hand hitting promotion effect while lighting in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to hit right.

(13) The second guide display is not affected by the switching display by fade-in and fade-out as the switching display of the background image performed in relation to the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 11-38 (d1) 11-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fading in and fading out).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (d1) to 11-39 (d4), the small right hitting promotion effect is switching of the background image by fading in and out when switching from the fanfare effect to the big win round. It continues without being affected by the display. As a result, even if the fanfare effect is switched to the jackpot round by switching display of the background image, the player can be urged to continue hitting to the right.

(14) The second guide display is not affected by the display in the advance notice effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, FIG. 11 -49 (g5), the portion where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the image display by the group notice effect).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (g5), the small right hitting promotion effect influences the display in the notice effect suggesting that a big hit will occur in the probability variable state after the end of the big win advantageous state. continue without As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the notice effect, the arrow image and the character image in the small right hitting promotion effect will continue to be displayed without impeding visibility. The player can be urged to hit right.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2)). Thus, in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production, and the frame lamp is in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production. part that does not light up).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, a mode according to the large right hitting promotion effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as in the first hit. , and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the promotion of hitting to the right in a manner that is frequently emphasized.

[Modified example of characteristic part 075F]
A modification of the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F described above will be described.

(About turning off the light before the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-25(c3), after all the lamps of the frame lamps are once turned off, the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. , not all lamps are turned off, and some lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) that lights up first in the big right hitting promotion effect may be lit. By doing so, it is possible to show well the connection when the frame lamps are subsequently turned on in a mode corresponding to the promotion effect of hitting to the right.

(About the switching display during the jackpot round)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (d1) to 11-39 (d4), as a switching display during the big win round, fade-in and fade-out are performed when switching from the fanfare effect to the big win round. Although the execution of switching display of the background image has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a presentation effect such as a white-out inserting a pure white screen or a blackout inserting a pitch-black screen between the fanfare effect and the jackpot round may be used.

Also, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a BGM selection screen for selecting BGM (music) may be displayed, and the background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen may be switched.

Further, as the switching display during the big win round, a mode selection screen for selecting the performance mode may be displayed, and the background image may be switched to the mode corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen.

In any case, even if a special switching display is performed during the big winning round, it is sufficient that the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is not affected.

(Regarding the display of the effect image in the probability variable state after the jackpot game ball state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (g5), as the display of the effect image in the probability changing state after the big hit game ball state, the image display by the group notice effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the display of the effect image in the variable probability state after the state of the jackpot game ball, a white-out effect in which a pure white screen is inserted during the ready-to-win effect, or a black-out effect in which a pure black screen is inserted may be used. It may be possible to use the effect of pseudo continuous notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decoration pattern multiple times, or the visibility of the decoration pattern is difficult by lighting or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. It is also possible to use a presentation effect that makes the In any case, even if a special effect display is performed in the variable probability state after the big hit game ball state, the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect should be unaffected.

(About aiming for V)
In this embodiment, as the specific area, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified. As shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V grand prize opening was displayed. However, not limited to this, the image display in the Aim for V effect, which is the third guide display using the image display related to the specific area, is not limited to pointing to the V big prize opening itself, but also pointing to the vicinity of the V big prize opening. Alternatively, it may refer to a path leading to the V big prize winning opening, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V big winning opening located upstream of the V big winning opening.

(Regarding the promotion of hitting the right hand)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-25(c4) to 11-31(c23), the graphic image of the arrow appears first, and then the character image of "Right shot!!" However, it is not limited to this. For example, the character image "Right shot!" may appear first, and then the graphic image of the arrow may appear. Further, the image display of the large right hitting promotion effect, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image, whereas the image display of the small right hitting promotion effect, which is an example of the second guidance display. may consist of only an arrow image or only a character image.

(About favorable conditions)
In this embodiment, the period shown in FIGS. 11-24 (c1) to 11-47 (f4) (the period from t3 in FIG. 11-20 to t16 in FIG. 11-21 ) was exemplified, but it is not limited to this. For example, the "advantageous state" period is the period excluding the fanfare production period, that is, the period shown in FIGS. period until t16). In addition, the fanfare effect and the big right hitting promotion effect may be executed during a period (symbol confirmation period) in which the symbol for the occurrence of the big hit is confirmed.

(Regarding the right-handed promotion effect in the case of the first hit)
In this embodiment, in the case of a big hit in the special figure 1 hit, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production, and the frame lamp is in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production. However, it is not limited to this. For example, depending on the type of jackpot in one special figure, the mode of the large right hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be varied. For example, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is the normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect. is not output, and if the big hit in the special figure 1 is a variable hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right-handed promotion production. You may output a sound in a form. In addition, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production, and the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production. may not be output.

(Regarding the right-handed promotion effect in the case of consecutive chan per special figure 2)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect. Or, the frame lamp does not light up in a mode corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, while the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the hard hitting to the right promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a manner corresponding to the hard hitting to the right promotion effect.

In addition, according to the type of consecutive chan per special figure 2, the aspect of the large right hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be changed. For example, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is the normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect. is not output, and if the hit of the hit in the special figure 2 is a probability variable hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting the right side, and the speakers 8L, 8R to the promotion of hitting the right side. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. In addition, when the consecutive wins in the special figure 2 hits are normal jackpots, the frame lamps are not lit in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion performance, and the loudspeakers 8L and 8R correspond to the large right-handed promotion performance. You can choose not to output sound with . If the consecutive chan per special figure 2 is a hit, unlike the first hit per special figure 1, a special mode (such as gold or seven colors) according to the frame lamp is a large right-handed promotion production. ), or a sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a special manner corresponding to the promotion effect of hitting to the right. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, a large right hitting promotion effect may be executed in a special mode (for example, a special character appears) different from the first hit with the special figure 1. .

(About the third guide display)
In this embodiment, as the third guidance display using the image display related to the specific area, the image pointing to the V big prize opening during the jackpot round of the probability variable jackpot is exemplified, but it is not limited to this. For example, as the third guide display, in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, an image is displayed to urge the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the second start winning hole, or a variable winning ball is displayed. Displaying an image prompting the player to fire a game ball aiming at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) may be applied. For example, after the ending effect is completed, the effect control CPU 120 sends from the CPU 103 a pending memory number designation command (C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), a symbol variation designation command (8D system command), a display result Based on the receipt of the specified command (8C system command) and the variation pattern specification command (81 system command), along with the arrow image pointing to the second start winning opening and the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), "Aim! ” may be displayed on the image display device 5 . Even if such an image display is performed, the graphic and character images in the small right hitting promotion effect should be continuously displayed.

(Regarding the control of the time saving state by displaying the lost pattern)
In each characteristic portion and modification described above, for the transition to the time saving state (high base state), the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 075F007A always operate via the big hit state and the small hit state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device You may make it transfer to a time saving state (high base state), without operating 075F007A.

In addition, as the time saving pattern described above, these time saving patterns may be part of the losing pattern or may be part of the small winning pattern.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a random number dedicated to the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processing, or the lottery random number of the losing pattern or the big hit pattern. A lottery random number, a lottery random number for a small win pattern, a random number for judging a big win lottery, a lottery random number for a falling lottery, or the like may be used for the lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with symbols displayed as other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a losing symbol. In addition, in this case, the presence or absence of transition to the time saving state may be determined according to the small winning pattern to be used together. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

In addition, in the case of performing the lottery of the time-saving design, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving design does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving design in all the setting values are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different probabilities between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Also, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing time-saving symbols, even when using a dedicated random number or when using another random number, the start opening (first start winning opening, 2nd starting prize opening) is acceptable.

In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, when using a special random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the lottery of the time-saving design is a small hit design. When a random number is used, a specific small hit pattern random number is used as the winning value, and when the random number for the falling lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, the random number for the falling lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time-saving design may be won when the game ball passes through the time-saving area.

In addition, when the time-saving design lottery is performed using a structure, when the small winning design uses the time-saving design together, the variable display number of the time-saving state (time-saving number of times) does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area passes. to

In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, when using random numbers for time-saving patterns, a specific losing pattern random number is used as the winning value, and when using a big hit pattern random number for lottery of time-saving patterns, it is specified. A jackpot pattern random number value can be used as a winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

Further, the judgment timing of the lottery result of the time saving pattern may be executed at the timing after the big hit judgment. In addition, the time-saving design lottery is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, without executing it in the time-saving state (high base) or high probability, regardless of which random value is used for the lottery. . However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each game machine.

In addition, as for the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of times of time saving according to the winning value (symbol) and each game state. In addition, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

Moreover, when the number of times of shortening of working hours differs according to the shortening of working hours pattern, it is possible to change the sorting lottery of the shortening of working hours pattern between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

Further, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result of "zero number of times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

Also, a derivation lottery for time saving end patterns (time saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times of time saving may be the number of times until the time saving end patterns are derived and displayed after the start of time saving or until the jackpot patterns are derived and displayed. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

Further, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the time when the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small win pattern random number is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, and when the small win is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small win operation.

Further, in the case of lottery using structures, the timing of control to the time-saving state is the timing of the end of the operation of the structure in the game state (for example, small win state) in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a game machine controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit (so-called specified number of times probability variable machine (ST machine)), a high probability low base state at the opening of the game hall , and after the high-probability low-base state is executed a specified number of times of variable display and ends, control may be performed to the time-saving state.

In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed when the time saving limiter function is installed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated. Also, the design fixing time of the time saving pattern may be different from the design fixing time of the other patterns.

In the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F, in order to control the game state to the time saving state, it was always via the jackpot game state, so to encourage the player to hit right in the time saving state. It is possible to perform the large right hitting promotion performance and the small right hitting promotion performance during the fanfare performance executed when the big hit occurs. However, if the above-described losing pattern is used as a time saving pattern, the game state is controlled to a time saving state without going through the big hit game state. In the period from when the pattern is displayed to when it is controlled to the time saving state, it is necessary to secure time for executing the large right hitting promotion performance and the small right hitting promotion performance. Therefore, the large right hitting promotion effect and the small right hitting promotion effect may be executed by the method described below.

For example, if the pattern confirmation time until the fluctuation of the losing pattern that is not the time saving pattern stops is set to 0.5 seconds, the pattern fixing time until the losing pattern that is the time saving pattern stops is set to 30 seconds longer than that. , You may perform the time-saving fanfare production which alert|reports the start of control of a time-saving state in the meantime. In addition, in the display result designation command (8C series command), the CPU 103 is different from the display result designation command indicating normal loss fluctuation without time reduction as a command for specifying loss, and time reduction is given. A display result specifying command indicating is prepared, and depending on whether or not the time saving pattern is a loss variation, both commands may be used properly and an effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol determination time to 0.5 seconds when a display result designation command indicating a normal loss variation is received, and the symbol determination time when a display result designation command indicating a time-saving loss variation is received. should be set to 30 seconds.

The effect control CPU 120 displays a name image indicating the name of the time saving state (for example, "time saving RUSH") on the image display device 5 in 30 seconds of the design confirmation time, and controls the time saving state from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output in a corresponding mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a mode corresponding to the control of the time saving state. Such a part of the time-saving fanfare effect can correspond to a part of the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 11-24(c2).

Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1), before the name image (“time saving RUSH”) by this time saving fanfare production is displayed, an image that congratulates the time saving state (for example, “O Happy!” character image) is displayed on the image display device 5, sounds congratulating the time saving state are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and lighting congratulates the time saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed so as to change the mode. In addition, as a small right hitting promotion effect, a small right hitting promotion effect is executed in which an image consisting of a graphic (an arrow pointing to the right) and characters (characters of "right hitting") is displayed in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5, A right-handed hitting sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 may be changed to a mode (lighting) that prompts right-handed hitting. It should be noted that the image in the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting by the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 start and end at the same timing. That is, both are designed to encourage the player to hit right over the same period of time.

After that, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 11-24 (c2), while the name image (“time saving RUSH”) is displayed by the time saving fanfare production, the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously executed, and then FIG. 11-25 (c3) Once the game effect lamp 9 is turned off in the same manner as in the example shown in FIG. 11-25 (c4) to FIG. You may perform a performance. During this time, the small right hitting promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right hitting promotion effect, the game state may be controlled to the time saving state similarly to the examples shown in FIGS. 11-48 to 11-50, and the small right hitting promotion effect may be continued.

In this way, even if it is controlled to the time saving state triggered by the lost pattern, by securing more pattern confirmation time than the pattern confirmation time in the lost pattern that is not the time saving pattern, the design confirmation time is large. A hitting promotion effect and a small right hitting promotion effect can be executed.

In addition, in the case of being controlled to the time saving state triggered by the lost pattern, as described above, not only those that execute the large right hitting promotion effect and the small right hitting promotion effect using the pattern fixed time as described above, but the loss of the time saving grant If there is a reserved memory corresponding to the loss for performing the next game (fluctuation) of the game whose pattern has been confirmed, in the next game (fluctuation), the short-time fanfare production is executed, and the large right hitting promotion production and small right A hitting promotion effect may be executed. Specifically, if the next game (fluctuation) after the game in which the losing pattern has been confirmed is a losing fluctuation, instead of performing a production that makes you expect a hit such as a reach production or a notice production, a time-saving fanfare production will be performed instead. Along with the execution, a large right hitting promotion effect and a small right hitting promotion effect may be executed. However, when the next game (fluctuation) after the game in which the losing pattern is determined is a big hit, the fanfare effect as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory for performing the next game (variation) after the game in which the lost pattern of the time saving grant is confirmed, the time saving fanfare production is executed with the pattern not changed, and the large right hitting promotion production and small A right-handed promotion effect may be executed. However, in this case, the CPU 103 does not transmit the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in order to prevent the performance of the customer waiting demonstration from being executed and hindering the time saving fanfare performance. . Alternatively, even if a customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) is received from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a time saving fanfare effect without executing the customer waiting demonstration effect.

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration relating to a characteristic portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Frame for game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5C, 5L, 5R Decoration symbol display area 6A Winning ball device , 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp, 10 general winning opening, 11 main board, 12 performance control board, 13 voice control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay Substrate, 21 gate switch, 22A first start switch, 22B second start switch, 23 count switch, 25A first hold indicator, 25B second hold display, 25C normal figure hold display, 30 batting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passage gate, 81, 82 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a movable body operably provided;
A specific effect of informing the effect result by operating the movable body, and a suggestive effect of suggesting that the specific effect will be executed by operating the movable body before the specific effect is executed. , a production executing means capable of executing
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium according to a player's operation;
Guidance display means for performing a guidance display urging the player to shoot the game medium toward the second area of the first area and the second area;
a guide light emitting means for emitting guide light to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second area by moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means;
The production executing means is
The effect image for the movable body is not displayed when the suggestive effect is executed, while the effect image for the movable body is displayed when the specific effect is executed,
displaying a specific image while executing the suggestive effect and changing the aspect of the specific image;
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
The second guidance display is performed during a first period of a predetermined period during which a start effect relating to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, and a second period during the predetermined period and after the first period. in performing the first guide display and the second guide display, and performing the second guide display while ending the first guide display in a subsequent period;
performing the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed;
The guidance light emitting means causes the light emitting means to emit light in a manner different from the guidance light emission during the first period, extinguishes the light emitting means before the second period starts, and the second period starts. A game machine that emits the guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display when the game machine is activated.

Images